IGCSE物理
真题汇编
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
Page 1
Page 50
Page 97
Page 136
Page 191
Page 239
Page 285
Page 331
Page 374
iStar Academy
同学少年国际学院
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/12
PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2015
45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*1041620377*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.
IB15 06_0625_12/3RP
© UCLES 2015
[Turn over
-1-
2
1
The diagram shows four identical spheres placed between two wooden blocks on a ruler.
sphere
wooden block
0
5
10
15
cm
What is the diameter of one sphere?
A
2
3
B
1.0 cm
2.0 cm
C
D
3.0 cm
4.0 cm
What does the area under a speed-time graph represent?
A
acceleration
B
average speed
C
deceleration
D
distance travelled
A car travels 100 km. The journey takes two hours. The highest speed of the car is 80 km / h, and
the lowest speed is 40 km / h.
What is the average speed for the journey?
A
4
40 km / h
B
50 km / h
C
60 km / h
D
120 km / h
The diagram shows a uniform beam being used as a balance. The beam is pivoted at its centre.
A 1.0 N weight is attached to one end of the beam. An empty pan weighing 0.2 N is attached to
the other end of the beam.
beam
pivot
1.0 N
pan (0.2 N)
How many 0.1 N weights must be placed on the pan in order to balance the beam?
A
5
© UCLES 2015
B
8
C
10
0625/12/M/J/15
-2-
D
12
3
5
A metal block has the dimensions shown. Its mass is 1000 g.
5 cm
10 cm
2 cm
What is the density of the metal?
6
A
 5 × 10 
3

 g / cm
 1000 × 2 
B
 2 × 5 × 10 
3
 g / cm

 1000 
C
 1000 × 2 
3
 g / cm

5
×
10


D
 1000 
3
 g / cm

 2 × 5 × 10 
The diagrams show four identical objects. Each object is acted on by only the three forces shown.
Which object accelerates to the right, with the smallest acceleration?
A
B
20 N
10 N
30 N
20 N
30 N
10 N
C
D
10 N
20 N
30 N
10 N
20 N
30 N
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-3-
[Turn over
4
7
Different weights are hung from a spring. The diagram shows the original length of the spring,
and the lengths when different weights are added.
15 cm
25 cm
35 cm
20 N
W
The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the weight hung from it.
What is the weight of W?
A
8
30 N
B
35 N
C
40 N
D
Which source of energy involves the splitting of heavy atoms?
A
chemical energy
B
geothermal energy
C
hydroelectric energy
D
nuclear energy
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-4-
45 N
5
9
A cyclist travels down a hill from rest at point X, without pedalling.
The cyclist applies his brakes and the cycle stops at point Y.
X
hill
Y
Which energy changes have taken place between X and Y?
A
gravitational potential → kinetic → thermal (heat)
B
gravitational potential → thermal (heat) → kinetic
C
kinetic → gravitational potential → thermal (heat)
D
kinetic → thermal (heat) → gravitational potential
10 The diagram shows a stone suspended under the surface of a liquid from a string. The stone
experiences a pressure caused by the liquid.
string
stone
liquid
What would increase the pressure on the stone?
A
decreasing the surface area of the stone
B
increasing the mass of the stone
C
lowering the stone deeper into the liquid
D
using a liquid with a lower density
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-5-
[Turn over
6
11 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer, used to measure atmospheric pressure.
P
L
mercury
Atmospheric pressure decreases.
Which row states what happens to the pressure at point P and what happens to the level L?
pressure at P
level L
A
decreases
falls
B
decreases
rises
C
stays the same
falls
D
stays the same
rises
12 Puddles of rain water remain after a storm. The water in the puddles gradually evaporates.
How does the evaporation affect the temperature of the water remaining in the puddle, and how
does it affect the average speed of the remaining water molecules in the puddle?
temperature of
water in puddle
average speed of
water molecules
in puddle
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-6-
7
13 The diagram represents moving gas molecules in a sealed container of fixed volume.
container
gas
molecule
The temperature of the gas is now increased.
What happens to the pressure of the gas, and what happens to the speed of the gas molecules?
pressure
of gas
speed of
molecules
A
increases
increases
B
increases
unchanged
C
unchanged
increases
D
unchanged
unchanged
14 The thermometer in the diagram has no scale.
stem
bulb
Where must the bulb be placed so that 0 °C can be marked on the stem?
A
in a freezer
B
in pure boiling water
C
in pure cold water
D
in pure melting ice
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-7-
[Turn over
8
15 Two metal blocks X and Y are at room temperature. Each block is heated so that its temperature
rises by 10 °C.
The blocks are now allowed to cool back to room temperature.
Block Y has a greater thermal capacity than block X.
Which block needs more thermal (heat) energy to heat it up by 10 °C and which block loses more
thermal (heat) energy as it cools back to room temperature?
more energy
heating
cooling
A
X
X
B
X
Y
C
Y
X
D
Y
Y
16 The diagram shows a vacuum flask used to keep liquid hot.
vacuum
hot liquid
How does thermal energy pass through the vacuum?
A
conduction only
B
convection only
C
radiation
D
conduction and convection
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-8-
9
17 A cupboard is placed in front of a heater. Air can move through a gap under the cupboard.
wall
cupboard
heater
air moves through gap
floor
Which row describes the temperature, and the direction of movement, of the air in the gap?
air temperature
air direction
A
cool
away from the heater
B
cool
towards the heater
C
warm
away from the heater
D
warm
towards the heater
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-9-
[Turn over
10
18 The diagrams show two water waves P and Q that are travelling at the same speed on the
surface of a pond. The diagrams are to the same scale.
P
Q
Which wave has the greater amplitude and which wave has the greater frequency?
greater amplitude
greater frequency
A
P
P
B
P
Q
C
Q
P
D
Q
Q
19 The diagrams represent water waves in a tank.
Which diagram represents a wave that changes speed?
A
B
barrier
C
barrier
D
barrier
deeper
water
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-10-
shallower
water
11
20 An object is placed in front of a thin converging lens.
The diagram shows the paths of two rays from the top of the object.
converging lens
object
An image of the object is formed on a screen to the right of the lens.
How does this image compare with the object?
A
It is larger and inverted.
B
It is larger and the same way up.
C
It is smaller and inverted.
D
It is smaller and the same way up.
21 Radiation from the Sun is dispersed by a prism. The prism does not absorb any of the radiation.
Four identical thermometers are placed, one at each of the labelled positions.
In which position does the thermometer show the greatest rise in temperature?
prism
radiation from
the Sun
A
B red light
C violet light
D
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-11-
[Turn over
12
22 A scientist tries to direct a ray of light in a glass block so that no light escapes from the top of the
block.
However, some light does escape.
light escaping
from top of block
top of block
glass block
X
ray of
light
The scientist changes angle X and stops the light escaping from the top.
Which row in the table describes the change to angle X and the name of the effect produced?
change to angle X
name of effect produced
A
decrease
total internal reflection
B
decrease
total internal refraction
C
increase
total internal reflection
D
increase
total internal refraction
23 A quiet sound is produced by a loudspeaker. The loudness of the sound is increased.
Which property of the sound wave is increased?
A
amplitude
B
frequency
C
speed
D
wavelength
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-12-
13
24 A man holding a starting pistol stands 640 m away from a spectator.
640 m
spectator
The spectator hears the sound of the starting pistol 2.0 s after seeing the flash from the pistol.
Using this information, what is the speed of sound in air?
A
160 m / s
B
C
320 m / s
640 m / s
D
1280 m / s
25 Which group contains only non-ferrous metals?
A
aluminium, brass, iron
B
brass, copper, lead
C
copper, iron, steel
D
copper, lead, steel
26 An electromagnet with a soft-iron core is connected to a battery and an open switch. The soft-iron
core is just above some small soft-iron nails.
electromagnet
soft-iron core
soft-iron nails
The switch is now closed, left closed for a few seconds, and then opened.
What do the soft-iron nails do as the switch is closed, and what do they do when the switch is
then opened?
as switch is closed
as switch is opened
A
nails jump up
nails fall down
B
nails jump up
nails stay up
C
nails stay down
nails jump up
D
nails stay down
nails stay down
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-13-
[Turn over
14
27 A student has wires of different lengths and different diameters. The wires are all made of the
same metal.
The student measures the resistance of one wire.
Which wire has a greater resistance than the wire he has measured?
A
a shorter wire with a larger diameter
B
a shorter wire with the same diameter
C
a wire of the same length with a larger diameter
D
a wire of the same length with a smaller diameter
28 The circuit diagram shows a 4.0 Ω resistor and an 8.0 Ω resistor connected to a 6.0 V battery.
6.0 V
4.0 Ω
8.0 Ω
What is the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0 Ω resistor?
A
0.5 V
© UCLES 2015
B
2.0 V
C
4.0 V
0625/12/M/J/15
-14-
D
6.0 V
15
29 Diagram 1 shows two thin, uncharged strips of plastic.
Diagram 2 shows the same strips after they have been rubbed with a dry cloth.
strips
of plastic
diagram 1
diagram 2
Which row describes the charge on the strips after rubbing, and the force between the strips after
rubbing?
charge on strips
force between strips
A
opposite
attraction
B
opposite
repulsion
C
the same
attraction
D
the same
repulsion
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-15-
[Turn over
16
30 The diagram shows a circuit which includes an uncharged capacitor and a switch.
Y
X
switch
capacitor
The switch can be moved between position X and position Y.
What happens to the capacitor when the switch is moved to position X, and what happens when
the switch is then moved to position Y?
switch at X
switch at Y
A
capacitor charges
capacitor charges
B
capacitor charges
capacitor discharges
C
capacitor discharges
capacitor charges
D
capacitor discharges
capacitor discharges
31 Two 5.0 Ω resistors are connected as shown in the diagram.
5.0 Ω
5.0 Ω
What is the total resistance of this combination?
A
less than 5.0 Ω
B
5.0 Ω
C
more than 5.0 Ω but less than 10.0 Ω
D
10.0 Ω
© UCLES 2015
0625/12/M/J/15
-16-
17
32 The diagram shows a 10 Ω resistor and a 20 Ω resistor connected in a potential divider circuit.
10 Ω
12.0 V
20 Ω
V
What is the reading on the voltmeter?
A
4.0 V
B
C
6.0 V
D
8.0 V
12.0 V
33 In the circuit shown, only one of the fuses has blown, but none of the lamps is lit.
Which fuse has blown?
power
supply
A
B
© UCLES 2015
C
0625/12/M/J/15
-17-
D
[Turn over
18
34 An e.m.f. is induced across a wire when it moves through the magnetic field between the poles of
a magnet.
Which electrical device operates because of this effect?
A
a battery
B
a cathode-ray tube
C
a generator
D
a motor
35 The diagram shows a flat, rectangular coil placed between the poles of a magnet.
There is a current in the coil that makes it turn in the direction shown in the diagram.
direction
of turning
coil
S
N
current
Which change would make the coil turn in the opposite direction?
A
decreasing the current in the coil
B
increasing the number of turns on the coil
C
reversing both the direction of the current in the coil and the poles of the magnet
D
reversing only the direction of the current in the coil
36 A transformer has 1000 turns on its primary coil. An input voltage of 12 V is applied to the primary
coil, and an output voltage of 120 V is induced across the secondary coil.
primary coil
1000 turns
secondary coil
input voltage
12 V
output voltage
120 V
How many turns are on the secondary coil of the transformer?
A
100
© UCLES 2015
B
120
C
1000
0625/12/M/J/15
-18-
D
10 000
19
37 The diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.
power
supply
vacuum
heated
cathode
cold
anode
The tube is not working properly.
Which change should be made so that the tube works properly to produce a continuous beam of
cathode rays?
A
Heat the anode instead of the cathode.
B
Reverse the connections of the power supply.
C
Use an a.c. power supply instead of a d.c. power supply.
D
Use air in the tube instead of a vacuum.
38 Which statement about α-radiation is correct?
A
It is a stream of fast-moving electrons.
B
It is a form of electromagnetic radiation.
C
It is more highly ionising than γ-radiation.
D
It is more penetrating than β-radiation.
39 A radioactive source produces a count rate on a detector of 1600 counts / s.
After 32 hours the count rate has fallen to 100 counts / s.
Both count rates have been corrected for background radiation.
What is the half-life of the source?
A
2.0 hours
B
6.4 hours
C
8.0 hours
D
16 hours
D
32
22
40 A nuclide has the symbol 10
Ne .
What is the proton number of a nucleus of this nuclide?
A
10
© UCLES 2015
B
12
C
22
0625/12/M/J/15
-19-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 0 8 0 7 7 2 4 1 5 0 *
0625/32
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (LEG/SW) 91111/3
© UCLES 2015
[Turn over
-20-
2
1
An experiment is carried out to find the acceleration of free fall.
A strip of paper is attached to a heavy object. The object is dropped and falls to the ground, pulling
the paper strip through a timer. The timer marks dots on the paper strip at intervals of 0.020 s.
Fig. 1.1 shows a section of the paper strip with the first three dots marked. The first dot on the
paper strip, labelled A, is marked at the instant the object is dropped.
0.0076 m
A 0.0019 m
paper strip
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)
(a) State how the dots on the paper strip show that the object is accelerating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the average speed of the object
(i)
in the first 0.020 s after the object is dropped,
average speed = .............................................................
(ii)
in the second 0.020 s after the object is dropped.
average speed = .............................................................
[3]
(c) Use the results from (b) to calculate the acceleration of the falling object.
acceleration = .........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-21-
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a cylinder containing gas compressed by the movement of a piston.
compressed gas
final position of piston
cylinder
initial position of piston
Fig. 2.1
Initially the volume of the gas was 470 cm3. The piston moves up and compresses the gas to a
volume of 60 cm3. The whole arrangement is left for some time until the gas cools to its original
temperature. The pressure of the gas is now 800 kPa.
(a) Calculate the initial pressure of the gas.
pressure = .........................................................[3]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, the effect on the pressure of the gas if it was not given time to
cool to its original temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) The area of the piston is 5.5 × 10–3 m2 (0.0055 m2).
Calculate the force exerted by the gas on the piston when the pressure is 800 kPa.
force = .........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-22-
[Turn over
4
3
An athlete of mass 64 kg is bouncing up and down on a trampoline.
At one moment, the athlete is stationary on the stretched surface of the trampoline. Fig. 3.1 shows
the athlete at this moment.
springs
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the form of energy stored due to the stretching of the surface of the trampoline.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The stretched surface of the trampoline begins to contract. The athlete is pushed vertically
upwards and she accelerates. At time t, when her upwards velocity is 6.0 m / s, she loses
contact with the surface.
(i)
Calculate her kinetic energy at time t.
kinetic energy = .........................................................[2]
(ii)
Calculate the maximum possible distance she can travel upwards after time t.
maximum distance = .........................................................[3]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-23-
5
(iii)
In practice, she travels upwards through a slightly smaller distance than the distance
calculated in (ii).
Suggest why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The trampoline springs are tested. An extension-load graph is plotted for one spring. Fig. 3.2
is the graph.
extension
X
0
0
load
Fig. 3.2
(i)
State the name of the point X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
State the name of the law that the spring obeys between the origin of the graph and
point X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-24-
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a device used as a thermocouple thermometer.
meter Z
wire of material X
wire of material X
wire of material Y
Fig. 4.1
In the table put three ticks against the correct statements about the thermocouple
thermometer.
Meter Z measures energy.
Meter Z measures potential difference.
Meter Z measures power.
Materials X and Y are different materials.
Materials X and Y are the same material.
Materials X and Y are electrical conductors.
Materials X and Y are electrical insulators.
[3]
(b) A liquid-in-glass thermometer is replaced by a similar thermometer with a larger bulb. No
other change is made.
State and explain the effect on the sensitivity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-25-
7
(c) The capillary of a liquid-in-glass thermometer should have a constant diameter.
Fig. 4.2 shows the capillary of a thermometer made with a manufacturing fault.
walls of
non-uniform
capillary
glass
bulb
capillary
Fig. 4.2 (not to scale)
State and explain the effect of this fault on the linearity of the thermometer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-26-
[Turn over
9
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a metal strip, held in a clamp.
metal strip
X
Y
Z
clamp
Fig. 5.1
The end of the strip is pulled down and released, so that the strip vibrates. X and Z are the
extreme positions of the end of the strip during this vibration. Y is the mid-position.
Explain what is meant by
(i)
the frequency of vibration of the strip,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
the amplitude of vibration of the end of the strip.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-27-
[Turn over
10
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows two tall buildings, A and B, that are 99 m apart.
99 m
A
B
P
33 m
Fig. 5.2 (not to scale)
A student stands at P so that his distance from building A is 33 m. After clapping his hands
once, he hears several echoes. The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
Calculate the time interval between clapping his hands and hearing
(i)
the first echo,
time = .........................................................[2]
(ii)
the third echo.
time = .........................................................[1]
(c) Write down an approximate value for the speed of sound
(i)
in water,
speed = .............................................................
(ii)
in steel.
speed = .............................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-28-
11
(d) Fig. 5.3 shows a dolphin in water emitting a sound wave of frequency 95 kHz.
Fig. 5.3 (not to scale)
Using your value from (c)(i), calculate the wavelength of this sound wave.
wavelength = .........................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-29-
[Turn over
12
6
The refractive index n of glass in air is 1.5.
(a) (i)
State the equation that relates the speed of light in air va, the speed of light in glass vg
and n.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the speed of light in glass.
speed = .........................................................[1]
(b) Light travelling in glass strikes the edge of the glass. Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light at an angle
of 41° to the normal.
normal
air
glass
41°
Fig. 6.1
(i)
The light passes from the glass into the air.
Calculate the angle that the ray makes with the normal in the air.
angle = .........................................................[2]
(ii)
State what happens to light that strikes the edge of the glass at an angle to the normal
much larger than 41°.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-30-
13
(c) Describe one example of how optical fibres are used in medicine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-31-
[Turn over
14
7
A physics teacher suspends two pointers in a magnetic field. One pointer is made of brass and the
other is a magnet.
She holds the pointers in the initial positions shown in the two upper circles of Fig. 7.1. She then
releases the pointers.
brass pointer
S pole of
magnet
S
N
N pole of
magnet
arrows show
direction of
strong
magnetic
field
draw final position of brass
pointer in this circle
draw final position of
magnet in this circle
Fig. 7.1
(a) In the lower circles of Fig. 7.1, draw the settled final positions of the two pointers.
(b) (i)
[2]
Explain the final position of the brass pointer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain the final position of the magnet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest a material from which the magnet is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-32-
15
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit containing a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V and a heater of
resistance 6.0 Ω.
12 V
A
6.0 1
Fig. 8.1
(a) State what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
Calculate the current in the heater.
current = .........................................................[2]
(ii)
State the name of the particles that flow through the heater.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii)
On Fig. 8.1, draw an arrow next to the heater symbol to show the direction of flow of
these particles through the heater.
[1]
(c) Calculate the thermal energy produced in the heater in 10 minutes.
thermal energy = .........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-33-
[Turn over
16
9
Fig. 9.1 represents a transformer.
A
240 V
a.c.
coil P
coil S
B
8000 turns
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i)
Name the process by which a changing current in the primary coil P causes a changing
current in the secondary coil S.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Suggest a material used for the coils. Explain why this material is used.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The input to the primary coil P is 240 V. This coil has 8000 turns of wire. The voltage obtained
between terminals A and B is 12 V.
(i)
Calculate the number of turns of wire in the secondary coil S.
number of turns = .........................................................[2]
(ii)
The resistor connected between the terminals A and B is replaced by four 12 V lamps
connected in parallel. The current in each lamp is 1.5 A.
Calculate the current in coil P. Assume the transformer is 100% efficient.
current = .........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-34-
17
10 (a) State the nature of an α-particle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Describe how an electric field between two charged plates could be used to determine
whether a beam of particles consists of α- or β-particles.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Describe the path of γ-rays in a magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) State what is meant by the term isotopes. Use the terms proton number and nucleon number
in your explanation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-35-
[Turn over
18
11 Fig. 11.1 shows the main components of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
fluorescent
screen
plate Y1
plate X2
heater
beam
P
grid
anode
system
plate
Y2
plate
X1
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i)
State the function of component P.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Tick one box to complete the sentence correctly.
A cathode-ray oscilloscope contains
air at about five times normal atmospheric pressure.
air at about normal atmospheric pressure.
air at about one fifth of normal atmospheric pressure.
a vacuum.
neon gas.
[1]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-36-
19
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows the front view of the screen of the cathode-ray oscilloscope.
C
B
A
Fig. 11.2
With no voltage applied between the X-plates or between the Y-plates, the spot is at A.
(i)
Place two ticks in each of the blank columns of the table to describe the voltages across
the plates when the spot is at points B and C. The column for the spot at A has been
completed as an example.
spot at A
spot at B
spot at C
plate X1 at higher voltage than plate X2
plate X1 at lower voltage than plate X2
✓
no voltage between X-plates
plate Y1 at higher voltage than plate Y2
plate Y1 at lower voltage than plate Y2
✓
no voltage between Y-plates
[3]
(ii)
Explain your answers for the spot at point B.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015
0625/32/M/J/15
-37-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 9 4 6 6 9 8 2 4 2 3 *
0625/62
PHYSICS
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2015
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 12 printed pages.
DC (CW/JG) 91130/2
© UCLES 2015
[Turn over
-38-
2
1
The class is investigating a pendulum.
Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the pendulum.
clamp
clamp
l
bob
one complete
oscillation
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2
(a) A student adjusts the pendulum until its length l = 50.0 cm.
State one precaution that you would take to measure the length l as accurately as possible.
You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
-39-
3
(b) The student displaces the pendulum bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. She
measures the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum (see Fig. 1.2).
(i)
Record the time t, in s, shown on the stopwatch in Fig. 1.3.
0 : 28 40
Fig. 1.3
t = ....................................................... s [1]
(ii)
Calculate the period T of the pendulum. The period is the time for one complete
oscillation.
T = ...........................................................[1]
(iii)
Explain why measuring the time for 20 oscillations, rather than 1 oscillation, gives a more
accurate value for T.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The student adjusts the length of the pendulum until its length l = 100.0 cm. She repeats the
procedure and obtains a value for the period T.
2.06 s
T = ...............................................................
Another student suggests that doubling the length l of the pendulum should double the
period T.
State whether the results support this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to the
results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) To continue the investigation of the relationship between the length l of the pendulum and the
period T, it is necessary to use a range of values of length l.
List additional l values that you would plan to use in the laboratory.
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
[Turn over
-40-
4
2
The class is investigating the cooling of water.
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
10
0
11
0
°C
(a) A student pours 100 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. He places a thermometer in the water.
Fig. 2.1 shows the thermometer.
–1
0
0
10
water
Fig. 2.1
(i)
Record the temperature θH of the hot water as shown on the thermometer in Fig. 2.1.
θH = ...........................................................[1]
(ii)
State one precaution that you would take to ensure that the temperature reading for the
hot water is as reliable as possible.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The student adds 50 cm3 of cold water to the hot water. He records the temperature θ1.
71 °C
θ1 = ...............................................................
Calculate the decrease in temperature θA using the equation θA = (θH – θ1).
θA = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
-41-
5
(c) The student adds a further 100 cm3 of cold water to the water in the beaker. He records the
temperature θ2.
57 °C
θ2 = ...............................................................
Calculate the decrease in temperature θB using the equation θB = (θ1 – θ2).
θB = ...........................................................[1]
(d) Suggest two factors, other than the volume and temperature of the cold water added, that
affect the decrease in temperature of the hot water.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Describe briefly how a measuring cylinder is read to obtain an accurate value for the volume
of water. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
-42-
[Turn over
6
3
The class is investigating the resistance of lamps.
Fig. 3.1 shows the first circuit used.
power
supply
A
V
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student measures the potential difference VP across the lamps and the current IP in the
circuit. The readings are shown in Figs. 3.2 and 3.3.
1
2 3
4 5 6 7
0
(i)
8
9
0.2
10
0.4 0.6
0.8
1.0
0
V
A
Fig. 3.2
Fig. 3.3
Write down the readings shown on the meters.
VP = ...............................................................
IP = ...............................................................
[2]
(ii)
Calculate the resistance RP of the lamp filaments using the equation RP =
VP
.
IP
RP = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
-43-
7
(b) The student rearranges the circuit so that
•
the lamps are in series
•
the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit
•
the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across all three lamps.
In the space below, draw a diagram of this circuit using standard circuit symbols.
[2]
(c) The student measures the potential difference VS across the lamps and the current IS in the
circuit in (b).
2.5 V
VS = ...............................................................
0.22 A
IS = ...............................................................
V
Calculate the resistance RS of the lamp filaments using the equation RS = S .
IS
RS = ...........................................................[1]
(d) (i)
A student wishes to vary the current in the first circuit, shown in Fig. 3.1, using a variable
resistor.
In the space below, draw the standard circuit symbol for a variable resistor.
[1]
(ii)
On Fig. 3.1, label with X a suitable position in the first circuit for a variable resistor used
to vary the current in all the lamps.
[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
-44-
[Turn over
8
4
The class is investigating reflection using a plane mirror.
Fig. 4.1 shows a student’s ray-trace sheet. The student uses an A4 sheet of plain paper.
A
M
e
R
30°
B
ray-trace sheet
eye
Fig. 4.1
(a) On Fig. 4.1, the mirror is placed along the line MR. Label the normal NL.
[1]
(b) The student places two pins P1 and P2 on line AB at a suitable distance apart, so that she
can accurately observe the reflection of line AB.
Suggest a suitable distance between the two pins.
distance = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
-45-
9
(c) The student determines the angle between the reflected ray and the normal by viewing the
images of pins P1 and P2 from the direction indicated by the eye in Fig. 4.1. She places two
pins P3 and P4, some distance apart, so that pins P3 and P4, and the images of P2 and P1, all
appear exactly one behind the other. She draws a line joining the positions of P3 and P4.
She measures the angle α between the normal and the line joining the positions of P3 and P4.
At this stage the angle θ between the mirror and line MR is 0 °, as shown in Table 4.1.
She moves the mirror to a new position, shown by the dotted line on Fig. 4.1, at an angle
θ = 10 ° to MR. She repeats the procedure with pins P3 and P4.
She continues using angles θ = 20 °, 30 ° and 40 °. The readings are shown in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
(i)
θ/°
α/°
0
32
10
50
20
69
30
92
40
108
Plot a graph of α / ° (y-axis) against θ / ° (x-axis).
[5]
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
-46-
[Turn over
10
(ii)
State whether your graph line shows that the angle α is directly proportional to the
angle θ. Justify your statement by reference to your graph line.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii)
Suggest why, when this experiment is carried out carefully, the points plotted may not all
lie on the graph line.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
-47-
11
5
The class is investigating the image formed by a converging lens.
Fig. 5.1 shows the experimental set up.
illuminated
object
u
v
screen
lens
Fig. 5.1
A student positions the illuminated object and the lens and then moves the screen away from the
lens until a sharply focused image of the object is formed on the screen.
The student measures the distances u and v, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
25.8 cm
u = ...............................................................
36.2 cm
v = ...............................................................
uv
(a) Calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f =
. Give your answer to a
(u + v)
suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
f = ...........................................................[2]
(b) State two precautions you would take in the laboratory in order to obtain reliable measurements
when doing this experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
Question 5 continues on the next page.
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
-48-
[Turn over
12
(c) The object in Fig. 5.1 is an illuminated triangle, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
Fig. 5.2
Suggest two differences between the appearance of the illuminated object and the wellfocused image on the screen.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2015
0625/62/M/J/15
-49-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/12
PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
May/June 2016
45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*8209657760*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 16 printed pages.
IB16 06_0625_12/2RP
© UCLES 2016
[Turn over
-50-
2
1
The diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. It is being used to measure
the length of a small feather.
mm
cm
10
20
30
1
2
3
What is the length of the feather?
A
2
B
19 mm
C
29 mm
D
19 cm
29 cm
The graph shows how the speed of a van changes with time for part of its journey.
In which labelled section is the van decelerating?
speed
0
A
0
3
B
C
D
time
A large stone is dropped from a bridge into a river. Air resistance can be ignored.
Which row describes the acceleration and the speed of the stone as it falls?
acceleration
of the stone
speed of
the stone
A
constant
constant
B
constant
increasing
C
increasing
constant
D
increasing
increasing
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-51-
3
4
A cup contains hot liquid.
Some of the liquid evaporates.
What happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?
5
mass
weight
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
stays the same
C
stays the same
decreases
D
stays the same
stays the same
A boy throws a stone. The stone leaves the boy’s hand and moves vertically upwards. Air
resistance can be ignored.
How should the force on the stone be described just after the stone leaves the boy’s hand?
6
A
downwards and constant
B
downwards and increasing
C
upwards and constant
D
upwards and decreasing
The diagrams show the dimensions and masses of four regular solid objects. The objects are
made from different metals.
Which metal has the greatest density?
A
B
C
D
2.0 cm
1.0 cm
2.0 cm
1.0 cm
2.0 cm
2.0 cm
mass = 20 g
© UCLES 2016
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
mass = 6.0 g
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
mass = 14 g
0625/12/M/J/16
-52-
2.0 cm
2.0 cm
mass = 32 g
[Turn over
4
7
A car travels along a straight road.
The speed-time graph for this journey is shown.
During which labelled part of the journey is the resultant force on the car zero?
speed
C
B
D
A
0
time
0
8
The diagrams show four objects A, B, C and D. The centre of mass M of each object is marked
on the diagrams.
Which object is not in equilibrium?
A
B
C
D
M
M
M
M
9
A skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10 000 J of gravitational potential
energy.
She skis down the slope. At the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000 J.
How much energy is dissipated in overcoming friction and air resistance as the skier moves down
the slope?
A
2000 J
© UCLES 2016
B
8000 J
C
10 000 J
0625/12/M/J/16
-53-
D
12 000 J
5
10 Which energy source is one that is used to boil water to make steam in power stations?
A
energy from tides
B
energy from waves
C
hydroelectric energy
D
nuclear energy
11 In a factory, two men X and Y try to move identical heavy boxes P and Q.
Man X tries to push box P along the floor. The box does not move because an object is in the
way.
Man Y lifts box Q from the floor onto a shelf.
shelf
man X
box P
man Y
direction
of force
object
box Q
direction of force
Which man does the most work on the box, and which box gains the most energy?
man doing
most work
box gaining
most energy
A
X
P
B
X
Q
C
Y
P
D
Y
Q
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-54-
[Turn over
6
12 A T-shaped girder is placed on the ground in position X. It is then turned over to position Y.
ground
position X
position Y
What happens to the force on the ground and what happens to the pressure on the ground?
force
pressure
A
increases
increases
B
increases
remains the same
C
remains the same
increases
D
remains the same
remains the same
13 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.
V
W
mercury
X
Y
Z
The atmospheric pressure increases.
Which distance increases?
A
VW
© UCLES 2016
B
WY
C
XY
0625/12/M/J/16
-55-
D
XZ
7
14 A liquid is evaporating. The liquid is not boiling.
Which statement about the liquid is correct?
A
Any molecule can escape, and from any part of the liquid.
B
Any molecule can escape, but only from the liquid surface.
C
Only molecules with enough energy can escape, and only from the liquid surface.
D
Only molecules with enough energy can escape, but from any part of the liquid.
15 The diagram shows a quantity of gas enclosed in a cylinder by a piston.
moves to the left
gas
moves to the right
cylinder
piston
The piston is moved to the left or to the right. The temperature of the gas is kept constant.
Which row describes the effect of moving the piston slowly in the direction shown in the table?
movement
of piston
speed of gas
molecules
pressure
of gas
A
to the left
increases
decreases
B
to the left
no change
increases
C
to the right
increases
decreases
D
to the right
no change
increases
16 Which statement describes what happens as ice at 0 °C starts to melt to become water?
A
Energy is absorbed and the temperature remains constant.
B
Energy is absorbed and the temperature rises.
C
Energy is released and the temperature remains constant.
D
Energy is released and the temperature rises.
17 What is meant by the fixed points of the scale of a liquid-in-glass thermometer?
A
the distance between one scale division and the next
B
the highest and lowest temperatures that the thermometer can record
C
the maximum and minimum depth to which the thermometer should be submerged in a liquid
D
the two agreed temperatures used for marking the temperature scale
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-56-
[Turn over
8
18 A liquid at room temperature fills a flask and a glass tube to level X.
X
Y
liquid
The flask is now placed in ice, and the liquid level in the tube falls to level Y.
Why does the level fall?
A
The flask contracts.
B
The flask expands.
C
The liquid contracts.
D
The liquid expands.
19 Which process involves convection?
A
bread toasting under a grill
B
energy from the Sun warming a road surface
C
hot air rising to the top of a cool room
D
thermal energy transfer through a copper bar
20 A rod is made half of glass and half of copper. Four pins A, B, C and D are attached to the rod by
wax. The rod is heated in the centre as shown.
The pins fall off when the wax melts.
Which pin falls off first?
glass
pin
A
copper
pin
B
pin
C
heat
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-57-
pin
D
9
21 Which row shows the natures of light waves, sound waves and X-rays?
light waves
sound waves
X-rays
A
longitudinal
longitudinal
transverse
B
longitudinal
transverse
longitudinal
C
transverse
longitudinal
transverse
D
transverse
transverse
longitudinal
22 Radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.
radio
waves
house
hill
The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be
A
diffracted.
B
radiated.
C
reflected.
D
refracted.
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-58-
[Turn over
10
23 The diagram shows a ray of light in air incident on a glass block. Some of the light is refracted,
and some of the light is reflected. Two angles p and q are marked on the diagram.
ray of
light
p
air
q
glass
Which row gives the angle of incidence and shows whether the ray undergoes total internal
reflection?
angle of
incidence
total internal
reflection
A
p
no
B
p
yes
C
q
no
D
q
yes
24 Visible light has a frequency of approximately 5.0 × 1014 Hz.
M and N are two other types of electromagnetic radiation.
The frequency of M is 5.0 × 106 Hz.
The frequency of N is 5.0 × 1015 Hz.
Which types of radiation are M and N?
M
N
A
radio waves
infra-red
B
radio waves
ultraviolet
C
ultraviolet
X-rays
D
X-rays
infra-red
25 What is the approximate range of hearing of a healthy human ear?
A
2.0 Hz to 2.0 kHz
B
2.0 Hz to 20 kHz
C
20 Hz to 2.0 kHz
D
20 Hz to 20 kHz
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-59-
11
26 A singer sings two notes. The first note is louder and lower in pitch than the second note.
Which statement about the two notes is correct?
A
The first note has a larger amplitude and a larger frequency than the second note.
B
The first note has a larger amplitude and a smaller frequency than the second note.
C
The first note has a smaller amplitude and a larger frequency than the second note.
D
The first note has a smaller amplitude and a smaller frequency than the second note.
27 Two nickel bars are placed close to the N-pole of a bar magnet.
The nickel bars become magnetised.
magnet
nickel bars
S
N
P
Q
Which row states the pole induced at P, the pole induced at Q, and the type of magnetic force
between P and Q?
pole induced
at P
pole induced
at Q
force between
P and Q
A
N
S
attraction
B
N
S
repulsion
C
S
N
attraction
D
S
N
repulsion
28 A student wishes to make a permanent magnet. She has an iron rod and a steel rod.
Which rod should she use to make the permanent magnet, and is this rod a hard magnetic
material or a soft magnetic material?
rod
type of magnetic
material
A
iron
hard
B
iron
soft
C
steel
hard
D
steel
soft
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-60-
[Turn over
12
29 Two meters are connected in a circuit to measure the current in a component and the potential
difference across the component.
Which meters are used and how are they connected to the component?
A
an ammeter in parallel for current, a voltmeter in series for potential difference
B
an ammeter in series for current, a voltmeter in parallel for potential difference
C
a voltmeter in parallel for current, an ammeter in series for potential difference
D
a voltmeter in series for current, an ammeter in parallel for potential difference
30 A wire has a certain electrical resistance.
The diameter and length of the wire may be changed.
Which pair of changes must cause the resistance of the wire to increase?
change of
diameter
change of
length
A
decrease
decrease
B
decrease
increase
C
increase
decrease
D
increase
increase
31 P and Q are the circuit symbols for two electrical components.
P
Q
Which components are represented by P and by Q?
P
Q
A
thermistor
fuse
B
thermistor
relay
C
variable resistor
fuse
D
variable resistor
relay
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-61-
13
32 The diagram shows two resistors connected in a circuit.
6.0 Ω
12 Ω
What could be the combined resistance of this arrangement of resistors?
A
4.0 Ω
B
6.0 Ω
C
9.0 Ω
D
18 Ω
33 The diagram shows part of a circuit used to switch street lamps on and off automatically.
+
LDR
–
In the evening it gets dark.
Which row shows the effect on the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (LDR) and on the
potential difference (p.d.) across it?
resistance of LDR
p.d. across LDR
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-62-
[Turn over
14
34 A domestic circuit includes a 30 A fuse. This protects the wiring if there is too much current in the
circuit.
In which wire is the 30 A fuse positioned, and what does it do when it operates?
position
operation
A
live wire
disconnects the circuit
B
live wire
reduces the current to 30 A
C
neutral wire
disconnects the circuit
D
neutral wire
reduces the current to 30 A
35 A strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.
current
coil
pins
What happens when the current in the coil is halved?
A
No pins are attracted.
B
Some pins are attracted, but not as many.
C
The same number of pins is attracted.
D
More pins are attracted.
© UCLES 2016
core
0625/12/M/J/16
-63-
15
36 The diagram shows a transformer.
input
voltage
output
voltage
primary coil
800 turns
secondary coil
40 turns
The input voltage is 240 V.
What is the output voltage?
A
B
6.0 V
C
12 V
20 V
D
40 V
37 A neutral atom consists of electrons orbiting a nucleus. The nucleus contains protons and
neutrons.
Which statement about the atom must be correct?
A
The number of electrons is equal to the number of neutrons.
B
The number of electrons is equal to the number of protons.
C
The number of neutrons is equal to the number of protons.
D
The number of electrons, neutrons and protons are all different.
38 Below are the symbols for five different nuclides.
35
17 X
37
17 X
38
18 X
81
35 X
81
37 X
nuclide 1
nuclide 2
nuclide 3
nuclide 4
nuclide 5
Which two nuclides are isotopes of the same element?
A
nuclide 1 and nuclide 2
B
nuclide 2 and nuclide 3
C
nuclide 2 and nuclide 5
D
nuclide 4 and nuclide 5
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-64-
[Turn over
16
39 Which row describes the nature and a property of all β-particles?
nature
property
A
electrons
can travel through a vacuum
B
electrons
stopped by a thin sheet of paper
C
helium nuclei
can travel through a vacuum
D
helium nuclei
stopped by a thin sheet of paper
40 The graph shows how the decay rate of a radioactive source changes with time.
4000
decay rate
decays / s
3000
2000
1000
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
time / days
What will be the activity at 8 days?
A
0 decays / s
B
125 decays / s
C
250 decays / s
D
500 decays / s
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2016
0625/12/M/J/16
-65-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 5 2 4 9 1 9 2 9 3 0 *
0625/32
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Theory (Core)
May/June 2016
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (NF/SG) 107603/6
© UCLES 2016
[Turn over
-66-
2
1
A student investigates water dripping from a tap (faucet).
9
10
Fig. 1.1 shows the dripping tap and a rule next to a container collecting the drops of water.
7
8
tap (faucet)
rule
5
6
drop of water
2
3
4
container
cm
0
1
water
Fig. 1.1
(a) Name the quantity that the student is measuring with the rule.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The student uses a digital stopwatch to measure the time between the drops of water. She
repeats her measurement.
Fig. 1.2 shows the reading on the stopwatch for all her measurements.
min
sec
1/100th
sec
time = .................... s
min
sec
1/100th
sec
time = .................... s
min
sec
1/100th
sec
time = .................... s
Fig. 1.2
(i)
On the line below each stopwatch, record the time, in seconds, measured by the student.
[1]
(ii)
Calculate the average time between drops of water. Show your working.
average time between drops = ........................................................ s [2]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-67-
3
(c) The student collects drops of water for 15.5 minutes.
Calculate how many drops leave the tap in 15.5 minutes. Use your answer to part b(ii).
number of drops = ........................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-68-
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows the speed-time graph for a student cycling along a straight, flat road.
8
speed
m/s
6
4
2
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate the distance he travels in the first 10 s.
distance = ...................................................... m [3]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-69-
5
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows three pairs of forces A, B and C.
60 N
20 N
backward force
forward force
50 N
50 N
backward force
forward force
20 N
70 N
backward force
forward force
A
B
C
Fig. 2.2
Identify which pair of forces, A, B or C, acts on the cyclist between 11 s and 16 s. Explain your
choice.
pair of forces .............................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) The cyclist pushes on one pedal with a force of 120 N. The area of his shoe in contact with the
pedal is 16 cm2.
Calculate the pressure on the pedal. Include the unit.
pressure = ........................................................... [4]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-70-
[Turn over
6
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a girl and a boy on a see-saw.
girl
2.4 m
boy
1.6 m
300 N
W
log
pivot
Fig. 3.1
The see-saw pivots on the log.
(a) Calculate the girl’s moment about the pivot.
girl’s moment = ................................................... N m [2]
(b) The see-saw is balanced horizontally.
Calculate the weight W of the boy.
weight of boy = ....................................................... N [3]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-71-
7
4
A student is investigating a mixture of water and ice. The water and ice are at the same temperature.
He uses a thermometer.
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a thermometer.
X
Y
–10
0
10
20
30
40
narrow tube
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
glass
scale
Fig. 4.1
(i)
On Fig. 4.1, label X and Y.
[2]
(ii)
The thermometer is put into the mixture of water and ice.
On Fig. 4.2, draw an arrow pointing to the reading on the scale.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
[1]
100
110 °C
Fig. 4.2
(b) The beaker of ice and water is left in a warm room for five hours.
State what happens to the ice during this time. Describe this process in terms of the molecules
in the ice.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-72-
[Turn over
8
5
Fig. 5.1 shows two circuits, A and B.
circuit A
circuit B
Fig. 5.1
Both circuits contain a 6 V power supply and two 6 V lamps.
(a) State two advantages of circuit B compared to circuit A.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the energy input and outputs, in one second, for one electric lamp.
useful energy output
energy input
10.0 J
wasted energy
8.2 J
Fig. 5.2
(i)
Calculate the useful energy output, in one second, of the lamp.
useful energy output = ........................................................ J [1]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-73-
9
(ii)
In the space below draw a labelled diagram, similar to Fig. 5.2, for a more efficient lamp.
[1]
(c) Electricity can be generated using wind turbines.
Fig. 5.3 shows two wind turbines.
Fig. 5.3
State two advantages and two disadvantages of using wind turbines, rather than fossil fuels,
to generate electricity.
advantages ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantages ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-74-
[Turn over
10
6
Fig. 6.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. Two regions have not been named.
gamma
rays
ultraviolet
rays
visible
light
infra-red
waves
radio
waves
Fig. 6.1
(a) Complete Fig. 6.1 by labelling the two regions that have not been named.
[2]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, circle the region with the longest wavelength.
[1]
(c) (i)
Suggest a use for gamma radiation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Suggest a use for ultraviolet radiation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-75-
11
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light incident on a rectangular glass block at point X.
W
P
air
X
Q
glass
R
S
Fig. 7.1
The ray of light is refracted at X.
On Fig. 7.1,
(a) draw the normal at X,
[1]
(b) draw the path of the ray through the glass block until it reaches the surface RS,
[1]
(c) label, at X, the angle of incidence with a letter i and the angle of refraction with a letter r,
[2]
(d) draw the path of the ray of light leaving the glass block.
[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-76-
[Turn over
12
8
Researchers have found that the best temperature for drinking coffee is 60 °C.
A designer has developed a new type of cup for keeping coffee at 60 °C. The cup is shown in
Fig. 8.1.
plastic lid
inner steel walls
coffee
shiny outer steel wall
material Z
vacuum
Fig. 8.1
Material Z has a melting point of 60 °C. At room temperature, material Z is solid.
Coffee, at a temperature of 90 °C, is poured into the cup. The coffee cools rapidly to 60 °C.
(a) State what happens to material Z when the hot coffee is poured into the cup.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain how the features of the cup enable the coffee to be kept at 60 °C for a long time.
plastic lid ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
vacuum .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
shiny outer steel wall ................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-77-
13
material Z ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[5]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-78-
[Turn over
14
9
(a) The resistance of a long piece of wire is 6.0 Ω. The potential difference across the wire is 2.0 V.
Calculate the current in the wire.
current = ....................................................... A [3]
(b) A force acts on a wire carrying a current in a magnetic field.
Fig. 9.1 shows the direction of the current in the wire and the direction of the force acting on
the wire.
wire
current
N
S
direction of force
Fig. 9.1
(i)
On Fig. 9.1, draw arrows to indicate the direction of the magnetic field.
(ii)
The magnetic field is reversed.
[1]
State what happens, if anything, to the direction of the force on the wire.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-79-
15
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field.
magnet
axle
N
N
coil
magnet
S
S
+ to
battery
–
axle
Fig. 9.2
The coil starts to turn about its axle.
(i)
State two ways of increasing the turning effect on the coil.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
Describe and explain the effect of reversing the connections to the battery.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-80-
[Turn over
16
10 Fig. 10.1 shows the charger for a laptop computer.
charger
Fig. 10.1
The charger contains a transformer.
(a) The voltage across the primary coil of the transformer is 230 V.
The primary coil has 4995 turns and the secondary coil has 555 turns.
Calculate the output voltage of the transformer.
output voltage = ....................................................... V [3]
(b) State the term used to describe this type of transformer.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-81-
17
11 (a) Any atomic nucleus can be represented as AZX.
(i)
State which letter, A, X or Z, is the
•
chemical symbol, .............................
•
nucleon number, .............................
•
proton number.
.............................
[2]
(ii)
A nucleus of americium-241 can be written as 241
95Am.
1. Determine the number of electrons in a neutral atom of americium-241.
number of electrons = ........................................................... [1]
2. Determine the number of neutrons in a nucleus of americium-241.
number of neutrons = ........................................................... [1]
(b) Explain what is meant by isotopes of an element.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-82-
[Turn over
18
12 (a) A radioactive nucleus decays by the emission of a β-particle.
State what a β-particle is and give its charge.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The graph in Fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a sample of a radioactive substance
varies with time.
4000
count rate
counts / min 3500
3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32 36 40
time / days
Fig. 12.1
Use the graph to find the half-life. Show your working on the graph.
half-life = ................................................. days [2]
(c) Following an accident, the soil around a nuclear power station is contaminated by
caesium-137, which is radioactive.
A sample of this soil containing caesium-137 has a count rate of 180 counts / min. Caesium-137
has a half-life of 30 years and decays by β-emission.
(i)
Calculate the count rate from the caesium-137 in the sample after 60 years.
count rate = ...................................... counts / min [2]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-83-
19
(ii)
Suggest why people do not want to live near the power station, even after it has closed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016
0625/32/M/J/16
-84-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 6 4 0 8 3 3 8 4 0 8 *
0625/62
PHYSICS
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2016
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 12 printed pages.
DC (ST/CGW) 108857/4
© UCLES 2016
[Turn over
-85-
2
1
A student is investigating the stretching of a spring.
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 1.1.
clamp
spring
l0
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, measure the unstretched length l 0 of the spring. Record l 0 in the first row of
Table 1.1.
[1]
(b) The student hangs a load L of 1.0 N on the spring and measures the new length l of the spring.
She repeats the measurements using loads of 2.0 N, 3.0 N, 4.0 N and 5.0 N. The readings are
shown in Table 1.1.
(i)
For each set of readings, calculate the extension e of the spring using the equation
e = (l – l 0). Record the values of e in the table.
Table 1.1
L/N
l / mm
0.0
e / mm
0
1.0
59
2.0
64
3.0
69
4.0
74
5.0
78
[1]
(ii)
Explain briefly one precaution that you would take in order to obtain reliable readings.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-86-
3
(c) Plot a graph of e / mm (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis).
[4]
(d) The student removes the load from the spring and hangs an unknown load X on the spring.
She measures the length l of the spring.
72 mm
l = ...............................................................
(i)
Calculate the extension e of the spring.
e = .......................................................... [1]
(ii)
Use the graph to determine the weight W of the load X. Show clearly on the graph how
you obtained the necessary information.
W = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-87-
[Turn over
4
2
A student is using a balancing method to determine the weight of a piece of soft modelling clay.
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 2.1.
soft
modelling clay
50.0 cm mark
metre rule
Q
P
pivot
bench
Fig. 2.1
P is a metal cube of weight P = 1.0 N. Q is the piece of soft modelling clay.
The student places the cube P so that its weight acts at a distance x from the pivot.
He adjusts the position of Q to balance the rule and measures the distance y from the centre of Q
Px
to the pivot. He calculates the weight W of Q using the equation W =
.
y
(a) On Fig. 2.1, mark clearly the distance x.
[1]
(b) Suggest a change to Q that would make it easier to find the value of y accurately.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) It is difficult to achieve an exact balance of the metre rule in this type of experiment. This can
make the result unreliable.
Explain how you would reduce the effect of this problem to improve the reliability of the
experiment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-88-
5
(d) The metal cube P is larger than the width of the metre rule.
Explain briefly how you would determine the reading of the metre rule scale at the position of
the centre of mass of P. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Before starting the experiment, the student determines the position of the centre of mass of
the metre rule.
Explain briefly how you would do this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-89-
[Turn over
6
3
A student is investigating the magnification of images produced by a lens.
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 3.1.
illuminated
object
a
b
screen
lens
D
Fig. 3.1
The student places a screen at a distance D = 80.0 cm from an illuminated object. The screen and
the illuminated object remain in the same positions throughout the experiment.
(a) She places the lens close to the illuminated object. She moves the lens until she sees a
sharply focused, enlarged image of the object on the screen.
She measures the distance a from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens.
20.3 cm
a = ................................................................
She measures the distance b from the centre of the lens to the screen.
59.7 cm
b = ................................................................
Calculate the magnification m1 of the image, using the equation m1 =
b
.
a
m1 = .......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-90-
7
(b) The student then moves the lens towards the screen until a smaller, sharply focused image
of the object is seen on the screen.
She measures the distance x from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens.
60.2 cm
x = ...............................................................
She measures the distance y from the centre of the lens to the screen.
19.8 cm
y = ...............................................................
Calculate the magnification m2 of the image, using the equation m2 =
y
.
x
m2 = .......................................................... [1]
(c) A student suggests that m1 × m2 should equal 1.
State whether the results support this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to the
results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) State two precautions that you would take in this experiment to obtain reliable results.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Suggest one reason why it is difficult, in this type of experiment, to decide on the best position
of the lens to obtain a sharply focused image on the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-91-
[Turn over
8
4
A student is investigating how the resistance of a wire depends on the length of the wire. The
student aims to plot a graph.
The following apparatus is available to the student:
ammeter
voltmeter
power supply
variable resistor
switch
connecting leads
resistance wires of different lengths
metre rule.
Plan an experiment to investigate how the resistance of a wire depends on the length of the wire.
You should
•
draw a diagram of the circuit you could use to determine the resistance of each wire
•
explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation
•
suggest suitable lengths of wire
•
state the key variables that you would control
•
draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings.
You are not required to enter any readings in the table.
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-92-
9
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-93-
[Turn over
10
5
A student is investigating the cooling of water.
90
Some of the apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1.
80
°C
70
thermometer
lid
insulation
water
beaker A
Fig. 5.1
(a) The student pours 200 cm3 of hot water into a 250 cm3 insulated beaker labelled A. He covers
the top of the beaker with a lid.
The student takes a temperature reading every 30 s as the water cools. The readings are
shown in Table 5.1.
(i)
Complete the column headings in the table.
[1]
(ii)
The starting temperature θ of the hot water in beaker A is shown on Fig. 5.1.
Record this temperature in the table at time t = 0 s.
[1]
Table 5.1
t/
beaker A
insulation and lid
beaker B
insulation, no lid
beaker C
lid, no insulation
θ/
θ/
θ/
85
78
0
30
80
79
74
60
77
74
71
90
75
70
68
120
73
67
66
150
71
64
64
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-94-
11
(b) The student repeats the procedure using a 250 cm3 beaker labelled B. This beaker is insulated
but has no lid.
He repeats the procedure again using a 250 cm3 beaker labelled C. This beaker has a lid but
no insulation.
All the readings are shown in Table 5.1.
(i)
Tick the statement that best describes the results of the investigation.
Removing the lid speeds up the rate of cooling significantly more than removing
the insulation.
Removing the insulation speeds up the rate of cooling significantly more than
removing the lid.
There is no significant difference between removing the lid and removing the
insulation.
[1]
(ii)
Justify your answer by reference to the readings.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State two of the conditions that should be kept the same in this experiment in order for the
comparison to be fair.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Suggest a suitable material for the lid. Give a reason for your choice of material.
material .....................................................................................................................................
reason .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-95-
[Turn over
12
(e) Describe briefly how a measuring cylinder is read in order to obtain a reliable value for the
volume of water. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2016
0625/62/M/J/16
-96-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/12
PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
May/June 2017
45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*2009621188*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 20 printed pages.
IB17 06_0625_12/3RP
© UCLES 2017
[Turn over
-97-
2
1
2
Which device is used to measure the time it takes for a 10 cm3 block of ice to melt in a laboratory
at room temperature?
A
measuring cylinder
B
ruler
C
stopwatch
D
thermometer
A student determines the average speed of a bubble rising through a liquid at constant speed.
When the student starts the stopwatch the bubble is at position P.
After 2.0 s the bubble is at position Q.
bubble
18
Q
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
P
26
cm
27
bubble
What is the speed of the bubble between P and Q?
A
3.2 cm / s
© UCLES 2017
B
3.7 cm / s
C
6.4 cm / s
0625/12/M/J/17
-98-
D
7.4 cm / s
3
3
The speed-time graph represents a motorcycle journey.
In which part of the graph is the acceleration equal to zero?
speed
m/s
40
C
30
B
20
D
10
A
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
time / s
4
5
Which expression is used to find gravitational field strength g?
A
mass × density
B
mass ÷ weight
C
weight × mass
D
weight ÷ mass
A block of ice is removed from a freezer. Some of the ice melts to produce water. Some of the
water that is produced evaporates.
The original mass of the ice is p. The mass of the ice that has not yet melted is q. The mass of
the water is r. The mass of the water vapour is s.
The diagram shows these changes.
before melting
after melting and evaporation
ice
ice
water
water vapour
mass p
mass q
mass r
mass s
Which equation gives the relationship between p, q, r and s?
A
p=q+r
B
p=q+r+s
C
p=q+r–s
D
p=q+s
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-99-
[Turn over
4
6
The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the
diagram.
cm3
cm3
200
200
100
100
mass = 80 g
mass = 180 g
liquid
What is the density of the liquid?
A
7
100 g / cm3
120
B
100 g / cm3
140
C
180 g / cm3
120
D
180 g / cm3
140
A car travels forwards along a straight horizontal road. Only the horizontal forces acting on it are
shown.
air resistance
and friction
driving force
The length of each arrow represents the size of each force.
How do these forces affect the motion of the car?
A
The car moves at constant speed.
B
The car moves backwards.
C
The car slows down.
D
The car’s forward speed increases.
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-100-
5
8
The centre of a uniform metre rule rests on a pivot. A load of weight 3.0 N is placed at the 70 cm
mark.
A force F acts upwards at the 80 cm mark. The rule is in equilibrium.
F
0 cm
50 cm
70 cm
100 cm
80 cm
rule
pivot
3.0 N
What is the magnitude of F ?
A
9
2.0 N
B
2.6 N
C
3.0 N
D
4.5 N
An energy resource is used to generate electrical energy.
Which energy resource uses a transfer of gravitational potential energy to generate this electrical
energy?
A
geothermal
B
hydroelectric
C
solar
D
wind
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-101-
[Turn over
6
10 The diagrams show athletes training by stretching springs.
Each spring has the same stiffness.
Which athlete does the most work?
© UCLES 2017
A
B
one spring stretched
by 0.60 m
one spring stretched
by 0.80 m
C
D
two springs stretched
by 0.60 m
two springs stretched
by 0.80 m
0625/12/M/J/17
-102-
7
11 The diagram shows a conical vessel full of water.
The pressure at point X due to the water is p. A point Q is a distance h above point X.
water
Q
h
X
Which graph shows how the pressure due to the water at Q varies with distance h?
B
A
pressure p
pressure p
0
0
distance h
0
D
C
pressure p
pressure p
0
0
© UCLES 2017
distance h
0
0
distance h
0
0625/12/M/J/17
-103-
distance h
[Turn over
8
12 In diagram 1 a manometer containing mercury (Hg) is connected to a gas tap. The tap is turned
off and the mercury is at the same level on both sides.
gas tap
gas
supply
diagram 1
mercury
When the gas supply is turned on, the mercury in the tube connected to the supply falls by 40 mm
and the mercury in the tube open to the atmosphere rises by 40 mm, as shown in diagram 2.
gas tap
gas
supply
diagram 2
mercury
What is the pressure of the gas in the gas supply?
A
40 mm Hg above atmospheric pressure
B
40 mm Hg below atmospheric pressure
C
80 mm Hg above atmospheric pressure
D
80 mm Hg below atmospheric pressure
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-104-
9
13 Brownian motion is observed when using a microscope to look at smoke particles in air.
What causes the smoke particles to move at random?
A
Smoke particles are hit by air molecules.
B
Smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.
C
Smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.
D
Smoke particles hit the walls of the container.
14 Which change is evaporation?
solid
A
D
liquid
liquid
B
C
gas
15 A glass bottle has a metal cap. The cap fits very tightly and is difficult to remove.
The cap and the neck of the bottle are dipped in a bowl of hot water. The cap can be removed
more easily.
What happens to allow the cap to be removed more easily from the bottle?
A
The cap contracts.
B
The cap expands.
C
The glass bottle contracts.
D
The glass bottle expands.
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-105-
[Turn over
10
16 Equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.
Liquid 1 is heated for 100 s and liquid 2 is heated for 200 s by heaters of the same power.
Each liquid has the same rise in temperature.
different liquids
of same mass
liquid 1
liquid 2
heating time = 100 s
heating time = 200 s
Which statement is correct?
A
Each beaker of liquid has the same thermal capacity.
B
Each beaker of liquid receives the same energy.
C
Liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.
D
The thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-106-
11
17 A copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. A piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.
The bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side
only.
wood paper copper
heat
Which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?
brown side
wood
copper
A
copper
conductor
insulator
B
copper
insulator
conductor
C
wood
conductor
insulator
D
wood
insulator
conductor
18 A glass of water is taken out of a refrigerator. Several ice cubes are put into the glass of water.
The glass is then left in the room for several hours.
The graph shows how the temperature of the water in the glass varies from the time it is taken
out of the refrigerator.
temperature
X
time
0
What does the temperature marked X represent?
A
boiling point of water
B
melting point of ice
C
room temperature
D
temperature inside refrigerator
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-107-
[Turn over
12
19 A hollow aluminium cube is filled with very hot water.
Side X of the cube is opposite side Y of the cube. One of these two sides is black and one is
white.
A student holds the back of one hand 5 cm from side X, and then immediately holds the back of
the other hand 5 cm from side Y.
aluminium cube
side X
side Y
5 cm
5 cm
very hot water
The hand held near side Y feels warmer than the hand held near side X.
Which row identifies the black side and correctly compares the rate of emission of thermal
radiation from each side?
black side
rate of emission
of thermal radiation
A
X
greater for X
B
X
the same for X and Y
C
Y
greater for Y
D
Y
the same for X and Y
20 What causes the change in direction when light travels from air into glass?
A
The amplitude of the light changes.
B
The colour of the light changes.
C
The frequency of the light changes.
D
The speed of the light changes.
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-108-
13
21 Light passes into a glass block.
Which is the angle of refraction?
A
B
D
C
22 Which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?
A
B
white
light
spectrum
white
light
spectrum
C
D
spectrum
white
light
© UCLES 2017
white
light
0625/12/M/J/17
-109-
spectrum
[Turn over
14
23 The diagrams show four sources of waves.
Which source produces longitudinal waves?
A
B
C
D
stick pushed up
and down in water
radio
transmitter
loudspeaker
lamp
24 The table shows different types of wave in the electromagnetic spectrum.
radio
waves
microwaves
infra-red
waves
visible
light
ultraviolet
waves
X-rays
gamma
rays
Where do all the waves travel at the same speed?
A
in a vacuum
B
in diamond
C
in glass
D
in water
25 A fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. An engineer adjusts the alarm so that it
produces a louder note of a higher pitch.
What effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?
amplitude
frequency
A
larger
greater
B
larger
smaller
C
smaller
greater
D
smaller
smaller
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-110-
15
26 What is wrong with this labelled diagram of a permanent magnet?
iron disc
N
S
A
The cross-section should be rectangular.
B
The length should be greater than the diameter.
C
The magnet should be made of steel.
D
The N-pole and the S-pole should be reversed.
27 Which statement about magnetism is correct?
A
An unmagnetised iron bar becomes magnetised when it is placed near a magnet.
B
An unmagnetised steel bar can be magnetised by passing a current through it.
C
Steel is used as the core of an electromagnet.
D
When an iron bar has been magnetised, it is difficult to demagnetise it.
28 A student tests the electrical conduction of four materials.
aluminium
iron
plastic
silver
Which materials conduct electricity?
A
aluminium, iron and silver only
B
aluminium and silver only
C
iron, silver and plastic only
D
plastic only
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-111-
[Turn over
16
29 The circuit diagram shows three resistors connected in series across a 6.0 V supply.
6.0 V
3.0 Ω
4.0 Ω
5.0 Ω
What is the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0 Ω resistor?
A
0.67 V
B
1.5 V
C
2.0 V
D
6.0 V
30 A thermistor is connected in series with a sensitive ammeter and a battery.
thermistor
A
Which change will give a larger ammeter reading?
A
adding another thermistor in series
B
cooling the thermistor
C
heating the thermistor
D
reducing the number of cells in the battery
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-112-
17
31 Three ammeters measure the currents in different parts of the circuit shown. The diagram
indicates the reading on the ammeters.
18 Ω
A
3.0 A
A
2.0 A
6Ω
A
1.5 A
How do we know that at least one of the ammeters must be faulty?
A
All three ammeters must read the same value.
B
All the current takes the easier path through the 6 Ω resistor.
C
The current from the battery must be equal to the sum of the currents in the two resistors.
D
The current in the two parallel resistors must be the same.
32 A student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.
R
T
V
12 V
S
What happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal T is moved from R to S?
A
It decreases from 12 V to 0 V.
B
It increases from 0 V to 12 V.
C
It remains at 0 V.
D
It remains at 12 V.
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-113-
[Turn over
18
33 The diagram shows an electric circuit.
20 Ω
0.40 A
10 Ω
What is the potential difference (p.d.) across the LDR?
4.0 V
A
B
8.0 V
C
25 V
D
50 V
34 A circuit-breaker is designed to protect a circuit which usually carries a current of 2 A.
The time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.
0.16
time taken
to break the
circuit / s
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
current / A
What happens when the current in the circuit is 2 A and what happens when the current is 18 A?
when the current is 2 A
when the current is 18 A
A
the circuit breaks in less than 0.01 s
the circuit breaks in less than 0.01 s
B
the circuit breaks in less than 0.01 s
the circuit does not break
C
the circuit does not break
the circuit breaks in less than 0.01 s
D
the circuit does not break
the circuit does not break
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-114-
19
35 What is the purpose of a relay?
A
to change a large voltage into a small voltage
B
to change a small voltage into a large voltage
C
to use a large current to switch on a small current
D
to use a small current to switch on a large current
36 A coil of four loops of wire is placed in a magnetic field. When there is a current, the coil
experiences a turning effect.
Some extra loops of wire are wound on the coil but the current is unchanged.
How does this affect the turning effect?
A
It is unchanged.
B
Its direction changes.
C
It decreases.
D
It increases.
37 Which particle has a negative charge?
A
an alpha particle
B
an electron
C
a neutron
D
a proton
38 The diagram represents the nucleus of an atom. The charged particles are shown.
+
+
+
Which row gives the proton number and the nucleon number for this nucleus?
proton
number
nucleon
number
A
3
4
B
3
7
C
4
3
D
4
7
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-115-
[Turn over
20
39 A sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.
The nuclei of which atoms will decay first?
A
It is impossible to know because radioactive decay is random.
B
It is impossible to know unless the age of the material is known.
C
The atoms near the centre will decay first because they are surrounded by more atoms.
D
The atoms near the surface will decay first because the radiation can escape more easily.
40 The half-life of a radioactive isotope is 4.0 years.
A sample of this material contains 24 million radioactive nuclei.
How many of these radioactive nuclei remain undecayed after 12 years?
A
0.5 million
B
2.0 million
C
3.0 million
D
6.0 million
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2017
0625/12/M/J/17
-116-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 4 1 9 5 0 7 0 9 6 9 *
0625/32
PHYSICS
May/June 2017
Paper 3 Theory (Core)
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (RW/SW) 125817/6
© UCLES 2017
[Turn over
-117-
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows students about to start a 50.0 m swimming race.
Fig. 1.1
(a) The length of the pool is 50.0 m.
Name a suitable piece of equipment that could be used to measure the length of the pool.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The race starts and the students swim to the end of the 50.0 m pool.
Fig. 1.2 shows the times recorded on the stop watches for the winner and the swimmer in
second place.
winner
min
s
second place
1 s
100
min
0. 58 75
s
1 s
100
1. 05 87
Fig. 1.2
(i)
Determine the time taken by the winner to swim 50.0 m. Use information from Fig. 1.2.
winner’s time = ...................................................... s [1]
(ii)
Calculate the average speed of the winner.
average speed = .................................................. m/s [2]
(iii)
Calculate the time difference between the winner and the swimmer in second place.
time difference = ...................................................... s [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-118-
3
2
(a) The walls of a room are to be painted.
A tin of paint has a total mass of 7000 g and a volume of 5000 cm3.
The empty tin has a mass of 500 g.
(i)
Determine the mass of the paint.
mass of paint = ...................................................... g [1]
(ii)
Calculate the density of the paint. Include the unit.
density = ......................................................... [3]
(b) The painter drops a brush into the tin of paint. The brush floats.
Suggest why the brush floats.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-119-
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a large sunshade.
arm
sunshade
pivot
support
base
Fig. 3.1
The arm holding the sunshade pivots about the end of a support.
(a) The sunshade has a mass of 20.0 kg.
Calculate the weight of the sunshade.
weight = ..................................................... N [3]
(b) (i)
Another sunshade is shown in Fig. 3.2.
This sunshade weighs 180 N.
The arm holding the sunshade extends 2.5 m from the pivot.
2.5 m
pivot
support
180 N
base
Fig. 3.2
Calculate the moment of the sunshade about the pivot.
moment = .................................................. N m [3]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-120-
5
(ii)
How can the moment produced by the sunshade be reduced? Tick one box.
by decreasing the height of the support
by decreasing the length of the arm holding the sunshade
by increasing the weight of the base
by increasing the weight of the sunshade
[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-121-
[Turn over
6
4
A house has white wooden walls and a black wooden door, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
white
black
Fig. 4.1
(a) The Sun is shining on the door and the front wall of the house.
(i)
State the name of the process by which thermal energy is transferred from the Sun to the
Earth.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Fig. 4.2 shows part of the white wall and the black door of the house. Two thermometers
have been attached, one to the wall and the other to the door.
thermometer A
thermometer B
Fig. 4.2
Thermometer A measures the temperature of the white wall. Thermometer B measures
the temperature of the black door.
The thermometer readings are recorded after the Sun has been shining on the house for
some time.
Suggest which thermometer has the higher temperature and explain why.
higher temperature ............................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-122-
7
(b) The air conditioning unit inside a room in the house is switched on. The air conditioning unit
takes in warm air and gives out cold air, as shown in Fig. 4.3.
cold air
ceiling
air conditioning
unit
room
door
Fig. 4.3
Explain how the air conditioning unit cools all the air in the room.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-123-
[Turn over
8
5
(a) A potato snack packet is taken onto an aeroplane. During the flight the pressure inside the
aeroplane changes and the potato snack packet changes shape, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
potato snack packet during flight
P
SN TA
TO
K
SN ATA T
CKO
potato snack packet before flight
PO
O AC
Fig. 5.1
Explain why the packet changes shape. Use ideas about the gas molecules inside and
outside the packet in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A deep-sea diver on a diving-boat experiences atmospheric pressure. When she is working
underwater, she experiences an increased pressure.
State two factors that affect the size of the increased pressure.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-124-
9
(c) Fig. 5.2 shows a device used for measuring atmospheric pressure.
mercury
Fig. 5.2
(i)
State the name of the device shown in Fig. 5.2.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Fig. 5.3 shows a manometer connected to a gas supply. The pressure of the gas supply
is greater than atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure is equal to 1033.6 cm of
water.
4
gas
supply
3
2
1
water
cm
Fig. 5.3
Determine the pressure of the gas supply.
pressure = ..................................... cm of water [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-125-
[Turn over
10
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows an overhead view of two cars approaching a road junction. A plane mirror
helps the drivers to see other cars.
plane mirror
road
ray of light
from car 1
driver 2
car 2
driver 1
car 1
tall building
Fig. 6.1
(i)
A ray of light from car 1 is shown.
On Fig. 6.1, clearly draw the normal to the plane mirror where this ray hits the plane
mirror. Label the normal N.
[1]
(ii)
On Fig. 6.1, carefully draw the reflected ray of light.
(iii)
State the law used in your answer to (a)(ii).
[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv)
Can each driver see the other car?
...........................................................................................................................................
Explain your answer.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-126-
11
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a ray of light incident on a glass block.
glass block
ray of light
Fig. 6.2
(i)
On Fig. 6.2, continue the path of the ray into the block.
[1]
(ii)
On Fig. 6.2, clearly label the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-127-
[Turn over
12
7
Fig. 7.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
radio
waves
microwaves
infra-red
waves
ultraviolet
waves
1
X-rays
2
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i)
Give the names of the two regions that are labelled 1 and 2.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
Use words from the box to complete the sentence.
acceleration
amplitude
frequency
speed
wavelength
Compared with other regions in the electromagnetic spectrum, radio waves have the
largest ......................................... and the smallest ......................................... .
[2]
(b) Sound is not an electromagnetic wave.
Give one other way in which sound waves are different from radio waves.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Two students, X and Y, carry out an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air.
X has two blocks of wood that make a loud, sharp sound when banged together.
Y has a tape measure and a stopwatch.
Describe how X and Y can use the equipment to measure the speed of sound in air.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-128-
13
8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a bar magnet.
S
N
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1, draw lines to show the shape of the magnetic field around the bar magnet.
Include at least one arrow to show the direction of the field.
[3]
(b) Explain how a coil of wire can be used to create a bar magnet from a suitable piece of metal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Which of these metals could be used to make a bar magnet? Tick one box.
aluminium
copper
soft iron
steel
[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-129-
[Turn over
14
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field.
coil
B
N
C
current
S
A
D
F
connections
to battery
+
–
battery
Fig. 9.1
The direction of the current in side AB of the coil is labelled.
The force F on side AB is also labelled.
(a) On Fig. 9.1, draw
•
•
an arrow labelled X, on side CD, to show the direction of the current in this side of the
coil,
an arrow labelled P, to show the direction of the force on CD.
[2]
(b) Give two ways of increasing the forces F and P on the sides of the coil.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-130-
15
(c) (i)
Name the particles that flow in the metal wire of the coil.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
The wire of the coil is replaced by a thinner wire. This wire is the same length and is
made of the same metal.
State and explain how this changes the current in the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-131-
[Turn over
16
10 A student wants to investigate how the resistance of a light-dependent resistor (LDR) varies with
the brightness of the light in the room.
(a) To investigate this, the student connects the circuit shown in Fig. 10.1.
V
V
Fig. 10.1
The student has made three errors.
Identify the three errors in the student’s circuit.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-132-
17
(b) The student corrects the errors. His results are shown in Fig. 10.2.
18 000
16 000
14 000
12 000
resistance
of LDR / Ω
10 000
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
0
20
40
60
% of full brightness
80
100
Fig. 10.2
(i)
Use the information in Fig. 10.2 to describe how the brightness of the light in the room
affects the resistance of the LDR.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
The potential difference across the LDR is 8.0 V.
Calculate the current in the LDR when the light is 60% of full brightness.
current = ...................................................... A [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-133-
[Turn over
18
11
(a) The plug for a television contains a fuse.
Explain the purpose of the fuse.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The circuit of the television includes transformers.
(i)
State the metal used for the two coils of each transformer.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
One transformer has an input voltage of 224 V and an output voltage of 16.0 V.
The input coil contains 308 turns.
Calculate the number of turns on the output coil.
number of turns = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-134-
19
12 Fig. 12.1 represents the particles in an atom of the element lithium.
neutron
X
Fig. 12.1 (not to scale)
(a) (i)
State the name of particle X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
State the charge of particle X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii)
Tick one box in Fig. 12.2 that correctly represents an isotope of lithium.
Fig. 12.2
[1]
(b) A sample of lithium contains 1.00 mg of a radioactive isotope of lithium.
Calculate the mass of the isotope that remains after 2 half-lives.
mass = ................................................... mg [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017
0625/32/M/J/17
-135-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 3 2 1 1 3 8 8 0 9 7 *
0625/62
PHYSICS
May/June 2017
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 12 printed pages.
DC (CW/FD) 127039/7
© UCLES 2017
[Turn over
-136-
2
1
The class is investigating the resistances of two resistance wires.
The circuit used is shown in Fig. 1.1.
power supply
A
A
B
D
C
S
V
resistance wires
Fig. 1.1
(a) A student places a sliding contact S on the resistance wire AB at a distance l = 0.200 m from
point A. She measures the current I in the circuit and the potential difference V across the
length l = 0.200 m of resistance wire.
Figs. 1.2 and 1.3 show the voltmeter and ammeter readings.
(i)
Write down the readings shown on the meters in Figs. 1.2 and 1.3.
0
1
2
5 6
7
3 4
8
9
0.2
10
0.6
0.4
0.8
1.0
0
V
A
Fig. 1.2
Fig. 1.3
V = ...............................................................
I = ...............................................................
(ii)
[2]
Calculate the resistance R of the length l = 0.200 m of resistance wire, using the equation
V
R= .
I
R = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017
0625/62/M/J/17
-137-
3
(b) The student repeats the procedure using the distance l = 0.400 m. Her result is shown.
2.54 Ω
R = ...............................................................
(i)
Calculate the difference between the two values for R.
difference = ...........................................................[1]
(ii)
Suggest a relationship between the length l and the resistance R of the wire that matches
the results, within the limits of experimental accuracy.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Using the same method as in (a), the student determines the resistance R1 of the resistance
wire AB of total length l = 0.500 m.
3.08 Ω
R1 = ...............................................................
She then uses a short lead to connect points B and D. She uses the same method again
to determine the combined resistance R2 of the resistance wires AB and CD connected
together.
1.50 Ω
R2 = ...............................................................
Use the student’s results to compare the resistance R1 of wire AB with the resistance R2 of
wires AB and CD connected together.
Tick the box next to the description that most closely matches the results.
R1 = R2
R1 = 2R2
2R1 = R2
There is no simple relationship between R1 and R2.
[1]
(d) Suggest two reasons why different students, all carrying out this experiment carefully, with
the same apparatus, may not obtain identical results.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017
0625/62/M/J/17
-138-
[Turn over
4
2
The class is investigating the refraction of light passing through a transparent block. A student is
using optics pins to trace the paths of rays of light.
Fig. 2.1 shows the student’s ray-trace sheet.
A
B
D
P3
C
P4
eye
ray-trace
sheet
Fig. 2.1
(a) •
On Fig. 2.1, draw and label a normal NL at the centre of side AB. Label the point E
where the normal crosses AB. Label the point M where the normal crosses CD.
[1]
•
Draw a line FE, to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 40° to the
normal.
•
Label the positions of two pins P1 and P2 on FE placed a suitable distance apart for
accurate ray tracing.
[2]
© UCLES 2017
0625/62/M/J/17
-139-
5
(b) The student observes the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block so that the
images of P1 and P2 appear one behind the other.
He places two pins P3 and P4 between his eye and the block so that P3 and P4, and the
images of P1 and P2 seen through the block, appear one behind the other.
The positions of P3 and P4 are marked on Fig. 2.1.
Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets the normal NL.
Label the point K where this line crosses CD.
[1]
(c) •
Measure and record the angle α between the line joining the positions of P3 and P4 and
the normal line.
α = ...............................................................
•
Measure and record the length x between points M and K.
x = ...............................................................
[2]
(d) The student repeats the procedure but with the line FE to the right of the normal.
He measures the angle β between the line joining the new positions of P3 and P4 and the
normal.
41°
β = ...............................................................
He measures the length y between M and the new position of K.
21 mm
y = ...............................................................
A student suggests that the results for α and x should be the same as the results for β and y.
State whether the results support this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to the
results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Suggest one precaution that you would take with this experiment to obtain reliable results.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017
0625/62/M/J/17
-140-
[Turn over
6
3
The class is investigating images formed on a screen using a lens.
Fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus.
illuminated
object
u
v
screen
lens
Fig. 3.1
(a) The lens has a focal length of 15.0 cm.
Suggest a suitable distance D between the illuminated object and the screen in order to form
a clearly focused image on the screen.
D = ...........................................................[1]
(b) The student places the lens as shown in the diagram a distance u from the object. She then
moves the screen until she obtains a clearly focused image on the screen.
It is difficult to decide on the exact position of the screen that gives the best image.
Explain how you would find the best position for the screen as reliably as possible.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Another student uses a different lens and obtains these readings:
15.0 cm
u = ...............................................................
29.7 cm
v = ...............................................................
Calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f =
uv
.
(u + v)
Include the unit and give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures.
f = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017
0625/62/M/J/17
-141-
7
(d) Suggest one difference that you would expect to see in this experiment between the
appearance of the object and the image.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) Which of the following procedures, A–F, are sensible for this experiment?
Circle one or more of the letters.
A
Carry out the experiment in a darkened room.
B
Close one eye when taking readings.
C
Draw thin lines.
D
Fix the rule in position on the bench.
E
Make sure the pins are at least 5 cm apart.
F
Repeat the experiment using different values of u and determine an average value for f.
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017
0625/62/M/J/17
-142-
[Turn over
8
4
The class is investigating the principle of moments.
Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used.
P
b
a
Q
metre rule
bench
5.0 cm mark
pivot
45.0 cm mark
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student places a load P on the metre rule at the 5.0 cm mark. He places the metre rule on
the pivot at the 45.0 cm mark. He places a load Q on the rule and adjusts its position so that
the metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced.
•
He measures the distance a between the centre of load P and the pivot.
•
He measures the distance b from the centre of load Q to the pivot.
•
He repeats the procedure placing the load P at the 10.0 cm mark, the 15.0 cm mark, the
20.0 cm mark and at the 25.0 cm mark. He keeps the pivot at the 45.0 cm mark each
time. The readings are recorded in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
© UCLES 2017
a / cm
b / cm
40.0
42.5
35.0
36.4
30.0
30.1
25.0
23.9
20.0
17.5
0625/62/M/J/17
-143-
9
(i)
Plot a graph of b / cm (y-axis) against a / cm (x-axis). Start both axes at the origin (0,0).
[3]
(ii)
Draw the line of best fit.
[1]
(b) A student suggests that a is directly proportional to b.
State whether the readings support this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to the
graph line.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017
0625/62/M/J/17
-144-
[Turn over
10
(c) The student uses a balance to measure the mass m of the metre rule.
120 g
m = ...............................................................
•
Calculate the value of mX, where X = 0.05 N cm / g.
mX = ...................................................... N cm
•
Use the value of a in the first row of Table 4.1 to calculate Pa, where P = 1.00 N.
P is the weight of load P. Include the unit.
Pa = ...............................................................
•
Use the value of b in the first row of Table 4.1 to calculate Qb, where Q = 0.80 N.
Q is the weight of load Q.
Qb = ...............................................................
[2]
(d) A student states that Pa should be equal to Qb.
Look carefully at Fig. 4.1 and the information in (c) and suggest what the student has not
realised.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017
0625/62/M/J/17
-145-
11
5
A student is investigating the effect of draughts (moving air) on the rate of cooling of hot water.
The following apparatus is available to the student:
an electric fan with four speed settings
a supply of hot water
thermometer
250 cm3 beaker
250 cm3 measuring cylinder
stopwatch
clamp, boss and stand.
Plan an experiment to investigate the effect of draughts on the rate of cooling of hot water.
You should:
•
explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation
•
state the key variables that you would control
•
draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your
readings (you are not required to enter any readings in the table)
•
explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.
You may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2017
0625/62/M/J/17
-146-
[Turn over
12
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2017
0625/62/M/J/17
-147-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/12
PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
May/June 2018
45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*0690604720*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 16 printed pages.
IB18 06_0625_12/2RP
© UCLES 2018
[Turn over
-148-
2
1
A length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.
cotton
cm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
When the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.
six turns of cotton
pen
What is the distance once round the pen?
A
2
2.2 cm
B
2.6 cm
C
13.2 cm
D
15.6 cm
A ball is dropped in an evacuated tube. A series of photographs is taken at equal time intervals
from the time of release. Another ball of the same size but twice the mass is also dropped in the
same evacuated tube and photographed.
Which diagram shows the motion of the heavier ball?
heavier ball (mass ×2)
first ball
© UCLES 2018
A
B
0625/12/M/J/18
-149-
C
D
3
3
A car takes 15 minutes to travel along a road that is 20 km long.
What is the average speed of the car?
A
4
5
0.75 km / h
B
5.0 km / h
C
80 km / h
D
300 km / h
Which statement about the mass and the weight of an object is correct?
A
They are both affected by changes in the acceleration of free fall.
B
They are both forces.
C
They have different units.
D
Weight is calculated by dividing mass by the acceleration of free fall.
Two objects P and Q are placed in a beaker containing a liquid.
Object P floats in the liquid and object Q sinks.
Which row for the densities of object P, object Q and the liquid is possible?
6
density of object P
g / cm 3
density of object Q
g / cm3
density of liquid
g / cm 3
A
1.2
0.6
0.8
B
1.2
1.4
1.0
C
11.3
8.9
13.6
D
11.3
19.3
13.6
The diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder.
The mass of the liquid is 16 g.
25
cm3
20
15
10
5
What is the density of the liquid?
A
0.80 g / cm 3
© UCLES 2018
B
1.25 g / cm 3
C
36 g / cm 3
0625/12/M/J/18
-150-
D
320 g / cm 3
[Turn over
4
7
A spacecraft is travelling in space with no resultant force and no resultant moment acting on it.
Which statement about the spacecraft is correct?
8
A
Its direction is changing.
B
It is in equilibrium.
C
Its speed is decreasing.
D
Its speed is increasing.
A man holds a short ladder in four different positions.
The weight of the ladder causes a moment about the man’s shoulder.
In which position is the moment greatest?
A
9
B
C
A hole is drilled in a square tile. The diagram shows the tile hanging freely on a nail.
Where is the centre of mass of the tile?
A
nail
D
C
© UCLES 2018
B
0625/12/M/J/18
-151-
tile
D
5
10 Which source of energy is renewable?
A
coal
B
natural gas
C
oil
D
wind
11 A student does work by pulling a box across a horizontal floor.
She now pulls a second box along the same floor.
Which row indicates that the student is now doing twice as much work?
force used
to pull box
distance the
box is pulled
A
is doubled
is doubled
B
is doubled
is halved
C
stays the same
is doubled
D
stays the same
is halved
12 Air is trapped in a closed tube by a thread of mercury. The mercury thread is 100 mm long. The
tube is held as shown.
air
mercury
100 mm
Atmospheric pressure is 770 mm Hg.
What is the pressure of the trapped air?
A
100 mm Hg
© UCLES 2018
B
670 mm Hg
C
770 mm Hg
0625/12/M/J/18
-152-
D
870 mm Hg
[Turn over
6
13 Brownian motion is the random motion of particles due to molecular bombardment.
In which states of matter is Brownian motion observed?
A
gases, liquids and solids
B
gases and liquids only
C
gases and solids only
D
liquids and solids only
14 The diagram shows the relative number of molecules in a liquid that have a given kinetic energy.
The graph is divided into sections so that each section contains the same number of molecules.
From which section does the greatest number of molecules escape from the liquid per unit time?
relative number
of molecules
A
B
C
D
0
0
kinetic energy
15 An electric kettle heats some water. The same kettle then heats a different liquid. The
temperature of the liquid rises more rapidly than the temperature of the water.
What is a possible explanation of this difference?
A
The liquid condenses on the cooler parts of the kettle less than the water does.
B
The liquid expands more than the water as it heats up.
C
The liquid has a lower boiling point than the water.
D
The liquid has a smaller thermal capacity than the water.
© UCLES 2018
0625/12/M/J/18
-153-
7
16 A wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.
wooden wheel
iron circle
Which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?
A
cooling the iron circle
B
heating the iron circle
C
heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle
D
heating the wooden wheel but not heating or cooling the iron circle
17 A student wishes to calibrate a mercury-in-glass thermometer with a °C scale.
Which values should she use for the lower fixed point and for the upper fixed point?
lower fixed point
upper fixed point
A
melting point of ice
boiling point of mercury
B
melting point of ice
boiling point of water
C
melting point of mercury
boiling point of mercury
D
melting point of mercury
boiling point of water
18 Four thermometers, with their bulbs painted different colours, are placed at equal distances from
a radiant heater.
Which thermometer shows the slowest temperature rise when the heater is first switched on?
A
matt black
B
matt white
C
shiny black
D
shiny white
© UCLES 2018
0625/12/M/J/18
-154-
[Turn over
8
19 A tank contains water. Ripples are produced on the surface of the water.
What causes the ripples to refract?
A
The cold water in the tank is replaced by warm water.
B
The ripples change speed as they move from deep to shallow water.
C
The ripples hit the wall of the tank.
D
The ripples pass through a narrow gap.
20 The diagrams show a wave on the surface of the water in a tank at times 1.0 s apart. The wave is
produced at P and travels to the right.
P
4.0 cm
P
Which row gives the frequency and the speed of this water wave?
frequency
/ Hz
speed
cm / s
A
2.0
4.0
B
2.0
8.0
C
4.0
4.0
D
4.0
8.0
21 Light passes from glass into air.
Which diagram shows a ray of light incident at the critical angle on the air-glass boundary?
A
glass
air
© UCLES 2018
C
B
glass
air
glass
air
0625/12/M/J/18
-155-
D
glass
air
9
22 Scout P signals to scout Q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the Sun’s light.
scout P
Sun’s
light
mirror
scout Q
Which mirror position allows the Sun’s light to be reflected to scout Q?
B
A
C
Sun’s
light
mirror
Sun’s
light
D
Sun’s
light
Sun’s
light
23 The table describes white light that passes through a prism and forms a spectrum.
Which row is correct?
colour refracted
the most
colour next
to the red
A
red
orange
B
red
yellow
C
violet
orange
D
violet
yellow
24 Where do all types of electromagnetic waves travel at the same speed?
A
air
B
a vacuum
C
glass
D
water
© UCLES 2018
0625/12/M/J/18
-156-
[Turn over
10
25 A siren is emitting a sound. As time passes, the sound becomes louder and higher pitched.
What is happening to the amplitude and to the frequency of the emitted sound wave?
amplitude
frequency
A
decreasing
decreasing
B
decreasing
increasing
C
increasing
decreasing
D
increasing
increasing
26 A permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron.
permanent
magnet
S
N
P
Q
soft iron bar
What are the polarities of end P and of end Q?
end P
end Q
A
N
N
B
N
S
C
S
N
D
S
S
27 The diagrams show three ammeters.
1
2
3.0
0
2.
A
Which ammeters show the same value of current?
A
1, 2 and 3
© UCLES 2018
B
1 and 2 only
C
1 and 3 only
0625/12/M/J/18
-157-
D
2 and 3 only
10.0
5.0
0.0
1.
0
8.
4.50 A
0
A
6.0
4.0
4.
0
2.0
0.0
3
11
28 A student measures the potential difference across a device and the current in the device.
Which calculation gives the resistance of the device?
A
current + potential difference
B
current ÷ potential difference
C
potential difference ÷ current
D
potential difference × current
29 A lamp is connected across one cell, then across two cells. The potential difference (p.d.) across
the lamp and the current in it are measured in each case.
The results are shown.
number
of cells
p.d. / V
current / A
1
2.8
0.25
2
5.4
0.40
What is the change in the resistance of the lamp when the number of cells is increased from one
to two?
A
It decreases by 0.015 Ω.
B
It increases by 1.5 Ω.
C
It increases by 2.3 Ω.
D
It increases by 17 Ω.
© UCLES 2018
0625/12/M/J/18
-158-
[Turn over
12
30 An electrical heater transfers thermal energy to the surroundings.
The graph shows how the amount of thermal energy transferred varies with time.
400
thermal energy
transferred / J
300
200
100
0
0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0 10.0
time / s
The heater continues to transfer energy at the same rate.
How much thermal energy is transferred by the heater in 5.0 minutes?
A
200 J
B
400 J
C
2000 J
31 Which electrical component does the symbol represent?
A
a fuse
B
a relay coil
C
a thermistor
D
a variable resistor
© UCLES 2018
0625/12/M/J/18
-159-
D
12 000 J
13
32 A student sets up this circuit.
What is the purpose of the circuit?
A
to allow a lamp to be made dimmer or brighter as required
B
to amplify the sound of a voice
C
to light a lamp in the dark
D
to sound a bell when the temperature rises
33 The diagram shows two voltmeters P and Q connected to a potential divider.
X
V
voltmeter P
V
voltmeter Q
The sliding connection at point X is moved towards the top of the diagram.
What happens to the reading on P and to the reading on Q?
reading on P
reading on Q
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
34 A simple electric generator induces an electromotive force (e.m.f.).
Which modification would increase the induced e.m.f.?
A
Increase the number of turns in the coil of the generator.
B
Increase the distance between the magnetic poles.
C
Reduce the strength of the magnetic field around the coil.
D
Reverse the direction of the magnetic field.
© UCLES 2018
0625/12/M/J/18
-160-
[Turn over
14
35 A transformer has Np turns in the primary coil and Ns turns in the secondary coil.
Which row gives the values of Np and Ns for a transformer that steps up a voltage of 1200 V to
36 000 V?
Np
Ns
A
2 000
60 000
B
2 000
600 000
C
60 000
2 000
D
600 000
2 000
36 A straight wire is perpendicular to the paper. It carries a current into the paper.
What is the magnetic field pattern and its direction near the wire?
A
B
C
key
wire with current into the page
© UCLES 2018
0625/12/M/J/18
-161-
D
15
37 In the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.
central
mass
orbiting
particle
What is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?
central mass
orbiting particles
A
neutron
α-particles
B
neutron
electrons
C
nucleus
α-particles
D
nucleus
electrons
38 The table shows the composition of three different nuclei.
nucleus
number of
protons
number of
neutrons
X
3
3
Y
3
4
Z
4
3
Which nuclei are isotopes of the same element?
A
X, Y and Z
© UCLES 2018
B
X and Y only
C
X and Z only
0625/12/M/J/18
-162-
D
Y and Z only
[Turn over
16
39 The table compares the penetrating abilities and ionising effects of α-radiation and of γ-radiation.
Which row is correct?
least
penetrating
most
ionising
A
α
α
B
α
γ
C
γ
α
D
γ
γ
40 Radioactive materials must be handled in a safe way.
What is not a safety procedure?
A
Monitor exposure time to radioactive materials.
B
Store radioactive materials in cardboard boxes.
C
Use tongs to pick up the radioactive source.
D
Wear protective clothing.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018
0625/12/M/J/18
-163-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 4 6 3 1 4 8 2 8 7 7 *
0625/32
PHYSICS
May/June 2018
Paper 3 Theory (Core)
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 16 printed pages.
DC (LK/CGW) 150266/5
© UCLES 2018
[Turn over
-164-
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a car.
speed
m/s
25
X
20
Y
15
10
5
0
0
W
Z
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, the labels W, X, Y and Z show the points when the car’s motion changed.
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line from each section of the graph to the correct description of the motion.
section of graph
description of the motion
accelerating
from W to X
decelerating
from X to Y
stationary
from Y to Z
constant speed
Fig. 1.2
[3]
(b) Calculate the distance that the car travels between 60 s and 100 s.
distance travelled = ...................................................... m [3]
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows that the car’s acceleration is greater than its deceleration.
Explain how the graph shows this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-165-
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a wooden raft. The raft is made from 8 logs.
The logs are all of the same type of wood.
log of wood
Fig. 2.1
(a)
The average mass of each log is 65.0 kg.
Calculate the total weight of the raft.
total weight of the raft = ....................................................... N [3]
(b) (i)
The mass of one of the logs is 66.0 kg. It is 3.0 m long and has a cross sectional area of
0.040 m2.
Calculate the density of the wood in the log.
density = ............................................... kg / m3 [3]
(ii)
Explain why the log in (b)(i) floats on water.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-166-
[Turn over
4
3
A man uses a metal bar to remove an iron nail from a piece of wood, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
150 N
wood
nail
0.50 m
pivot
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i)
The man applies a force of 150 N at a distance of 0.50 m from the pivot.
Calculate the moment of this force about the pivot. Include a unit.
moment = ...........................................................[4]
(ii)
The force applied by the man produces a turning effect (moment) about the pivot.
Describe another example of using the turning effect of a force.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The man tries to use the metal bar to remove another nail from the piece of wood. He applies
the same force of 150 N at a distance of 0.50 m from the pivot.
The turning effect produced is not enough to remove this nail from the piece of wood.
Describe how the man can increase the turning effect without increasing the force.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-167-
5
4
A Bunsen burner heats a beaker of water, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
thermometer
stand
beaker
water
Bunsen burner
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i)
Fig. 4.2 shows the thermometer used in Fig. 4.1.
State the temperature shown on the thermometer.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
°C
Fig. 4.2
temperature = .................................................... ° C [1]
(ii)
The thermometer shown in Fig. 4.2 uses a physical property that changes with
temperature.
Indicate the measurable property that changes with temperature. Tick one box.
expansion of glass
expansion of liquid
colour of liquid
colour of glass
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0625/32/M/J/18
-168-
[Turn over
6
(b) Thermal energy (heat) transfers through the bottom of the beaker to the water.
State the name given to this process.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Thermal energy transfers throughout the water in the beaker.
Describe and explain how this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-169-
7
5
Fig. 5.1 represents an object positioned on the principal axis of a thin lens.
principal
axis
object
F
F
Fig. 5.1
Each small square of the grid represents 0.5 cm. Each principal focus of the lens is labelled F.
(a) Use the grid to determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ..................................................... cm [1]
(b) (i)
On Fig. 5.1, draw a ray from the top of the object that passes through a principal focus,
then through the lens and beyond it.
[1]
(ii)
On Fig. 5.1, draw a second ray from the top of the object that passes through the centre
of the lens. Continue the path of this ray to the edge of the grid.
[1]
(iii)
On Fig. 5.1, draw an arrow to show the position and nature of the image produced by the
lens.
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-170-
[Turn over
8
6
Nuclear fission is used in nuclear power stations to release thermal energy.
(a) Describe how the thermal energy is used to generate electricity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Describe two environmental problems that are due to using nuclear power stations.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-171-
9
7
Fig. 7.1 shows some parts of the electromagnetic spectrum.
radio
waves
infra-red
waves
visible
light
ultraviolet
waves
X-rays
γ-rays
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i)
In Fig. 7.1, one part of the electromagnetic spectrum is not labelled.
State the name of this part.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
The speed of visible light waves in a vacuum is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Suggest a value for the speed of infra-red waves in a vacuum.
speed = .................................................. m / s [1]
(iii)
Some parts of the electromagnetic spectrum have a wavelength shorter than that of
visible light.
State one example.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
X-rays and γ-rays are used in hospitals.
Describe one medical use for X-rays and one use for γ-rays.
X-rays ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
γ-rays .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
Explain why γ-rays are dangerous to living things.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-172-
[Turn over
10
8
(a) Complete the sentences about sound. Use words from the box above each sentence.
(i)
glows
reflects
refracts
vibrates
Sound is produced when a source .............................................. .
(ii)
electromagnetic
longitudinal
[1]
transverse
Sound waves are .............................................. waves.
(iii)
metal
vacuum
[1]
liquid
Sound waves cannot travel through a .............................................. .
[1]
(b) Humans, elephants, mice and dolphins have different hearing ranges. Fig. 8.1 shows the
hearing range for each type of animal.
1000 000
100 000
frequency / Hz
10 000
1000
100
10
0
humans
elephants
mice
dolphins
Fig. 8.1
(i)
State the lowest frequency of sound that can be heard by mice.
................................................................................................................................ Hz [1]
(ii)
State the highest frequency of sound that can be heard by elephants.
................................................................................................................................ Hz [1]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-173-
11
(iii)
Explain how the chart shows that elephants can hear some sounds that humans cannot
hear.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iv)
State the term given to the high frequencies that dolphins can hear but humans cannot
hear.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-174-
[Turn over
12
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a simple circuit.
A
0.50 A
V
12.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
Fig. 9.1
(i)
The current in the wires of the circuit is a flow of particles.
Indicate the name of these particles. Tick one box.
electrons
atoms
protons
(ii)
[1]
Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [1]
(iii)
Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) reading that would be shown on the voltmeter.
potential difference (p.d.) = ...................................................... V [3]
(b) The circuit is changed.
The two resistors are connected in parallel.
Explain what happens, if anything, to the current reading on the ammeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-175-
13
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a balloon hanging from an insulating thread.
insulating
thread
balloon
Fig. 10.1
(i)
A student gives the balloon a positive charge.
Which statement explains why the balloon becomes positively charged? Tick one box.
The balloon gains electrons
The balloon loses electrons
The balloon gains protons
The balloon loses protons
© UCLES 2018
[1]
0625/32/M/J/18
-176-
[Turn over
14
(ii)
The student brings a charged rod close to the balloon as shown in Fig. 10.2.
+ +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + +
charged
rod
Fig. 10.2
State the type of charge on the rod.
..................................................................................
Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Electrical charges can move easily through some materials.
Draw a circle around each material that charges can move through easily.
copper
plastic
rubber
silver
wood
[1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-177-
15
11
Fig. 11.1 represents a transformer.
P
a.c. input
Q
primary coil
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i)
State the name of the part of the transformer labelled Q in Fig. 11.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
In Fig. 11.1, part P is made from a metal.
1. State the metal used to make part P. ..........................................................................
2. State the term given to part P. ....................................................................................
[2]
(iii)
There is an alternating current (a.c.) in the primary coil.
Describe what this current produces in part P.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iv)
Complete the sentence using terms from the box.
more
fewer
step-up
step-down
When there are ......................... turns in the primary coil than in Q, the device is called a
......................... transformer.
[1]
(b) The high-voltage transmission of electricity uses transformers.
Describe two advantages of transmitting electricity at high voltages rather than at low voltages.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-178-
[Turn over
16
12 (a) The nuclide notation AZ X describes the nucleus of one type of atom.
Draw a line from each symbol to the correct description for that symbol.
symbol
A
description
number of neutrons
element symbol
Z
proton number
nucleon number
X
number of atoms
[3]
(b) (i)
One radioactive isotope has a half-life of 6.0 years.
A sample of this isotope has a mass of 12 mg.
Calculate the mass of this isotope that remains in the sample after 18 years.
mass remaining = .................................................... mg [3]
(ii)
The sample decays by emitting a β-particle.
Describe the nature of a β-particle.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii)
Describe how the nucleus of the isotope changes due to the emission of a β-particle.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018
0625/32/M/J/18
-179-
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 4 3 2 2 9 1 5 7 8 1 *
0625/62
PHYSICS
May/June 2018
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (SC/CGW) 150895/6
© UCLES 2018
[Turn over
-180-
2
1
A student is determining the density of water. She is provided with a plastic cup, shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
(a) She draws around the base of the cup. Her drawing is shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(i)
From Fig. 1.2, take and record measurements to determine an accurate value for the
diameter DB of the base of the cup.
DB = ................................................... cm [2]
(ii)
The student places the cup upside down and draws around the rim of the cup.
She determines the diameter DT of the rim of the cup.
7.2 cm
DT = ..............................................................
Calculate the average diameter D of the cup using the equation D =
DB + DT
.
2
D = ................................................... cm [1]
© UCLES 2018
0625/62/M/J/18
-181-
3
(b) 1.
On Fig. 1.3, measure the vertical height h of the cup.
h
Fig. 1.3
h = ........................................................ cm
2.
Calculate the volume V of the cup using the equation V = 0.785 D 2 h.
V = ...................................................... cm3
[1]
(c) The student fills the cup with water. The mass of the cup with the water is shown in Fig. 1.4.
232 g
Fig. 1.4
Determine the density ρ of water using the equation ρ =
m
and your value from (b)2.
V
Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. Include the
unit.
ρ = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2018
0625/62/M/J/18
-182-
[Turn over
4
(d) Suggest, with a reason, a part of the procedure (a), (b) or (c) that could give an unreliable
result for the density of water.
part .......................
reason .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(e) The student pours the water from the cup into a measuring cylinder.
Draw a diagram to show water in a measuring cylinder. Show clearly the meniscus and the
line of sight the student should use to obtain an accurate value for the volume of the water.
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018
0625/62/M/J/18
-183-
5
2
A student is investigating the cooling of water.
Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus used.
thermometer
bench
Fig. 2.1
(a) The thermometer in Fig. 2.2 shows room temperature θR at the beginning of the experiment.
Record θR.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
°C
Fig. 2.2
θR = ......................................................... [1]
(b) The student pours 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker.
He records the temperature θH of the hot water at time t = 0 and immediately starts a
stopclock.
He continues recording the temperature readings every 30 s. The readings are shown in
Table 2.1.
(i)
Explain why the student should wait a few seconds after placing the thermometer in the
hot water before taking the first temperature reading.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018
0625/62/M/J/18
-184-
[Turn over
6
(ii)
Complete the column headings in Table 2.1.
[1]
(iii)
Complete the time column in Table 2.1.
[1]
Table 2.1
t/
θ/
0
70
60
52
49
46
43
(iv)
Plot a graph of θ / °C (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis). You do not need to start the y-axis at
the origin (0,0) but the value of room temperature θR must be marked on the y-axis.
[4]
© UCLES 2018
0625/62/M/J/18
-185-
7
(c) Draw a horizontal line across the graph grid to indicate the value of room temperature θR, as
shown by the thermometer in Fig. 2.2.
[1]
(d) State two precautions that you would take in order to obtain accurate readings in
this experiment.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) A student plans to repeat the experiment using the same thermometer and the same volume
of water.
Suggest two changes to the apparatus or the procedure that would increase the rate of
cooling of the water.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2018
0625/62/M/J/18
-186-
[Turn over
8
3
A student is determining the focal length of a lens.
Fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus used.
screen
illuminated
object
v
lens
Fig. 3.1
(a) The student adjusts the position of the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on
the screen.
(i)
On Fig. 3.1, measure the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.
v = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
Fig. 3.1 is drawn 1/5th actual size.
Calculate V, the actual distance from the lens to the screen
V = ......................................................... [1]
(iii)
With a clearly focused image formed on the screen, the actual distance from the centre
of the lens to the illuminated object, U is 20.0 cm.
Calculate the focal length f1 of the lens using the equation f1 =
UV
.
(U + V )
f1 = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The student repeats the procedure in (a), using a different distance U. She obtains another
value for the focal length f2.
12.2 cm
f2 = ..............................................................
Calculate the average value fA of the focal length of the lens, using f2 and your value for f1
in (a)(iii). Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
fA = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018
0625/62/M/J/18
-187-
9
(c) The student states that taking more measurements improves the reliability of the value
obtained for fA.
Suggest additional values for U that you would use.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State two precautions that you would take in this experiment to obtain accurate readings.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018
0625/62/M/J/18
-188-
[Turn over
10
4
A student is investigating whether the distance that a toy truck will travel along a horizontal floor,
before stopping, depends on its mass.
The following apparatus is available to the student:
a ramp
blocks to support the ramp as shown in Fig. 4.1
toy truck
a selection of masses
other standard apparatus from the physics laboratory.
Plan an experiment to investigate whether the distance that the toy truck will travel along a
horizontal floor, before stopping, depends on its mass.
In your plan, you should:
•
explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation
•
state any apparatus that you would use that is not included in the list above
•
state the key variables that you would control
•
draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your
readings (you are not required to enter any readings in the table).
You may add to the diagram in Fig. 4.1 to help your description.
ramp
floor
blocks
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2018
0625/62/M/J/18
-189-
11
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018
0625/62/M/J/18
-190-
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/12
PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
May/June 2019
45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*0286316185*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 20 printed pages.
IB19 06_0625_12/4RP
© UCLES 2019
[Turn over
-191-
2
1
Diagram 1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water. A metal weight with a cork attached by
a thread is held above the water.
Diagram 2 shows the apparatus after the weight has been lowered into the water.
Diagram 3 shows the apparatus after the weight and the cork have been submerged.
cork
cm3
cm3
cm3
50
50
50
40
40
30
30
30
20
20
20
10
10
10
diagram 1
diagram 2
diagram 3
40
thread
metal
weight
What is the volume of the cork?
A
20 cm3
© UCLES 2019
B
30 cm3
C
45 cm3
0625/12/M/J/19
-192-
D
70 cm3
measuring
cylinder
3
2
A car travels at constant speed.
Which pair of graphs show both how the distance travelled by the car and the car’s speed vary
with time?
distance
speed
A
0
0
time
distance
0
0
time
0
time
0
time
0
time
speed
B
0
0
time
distance
0
speed
C
0
0
time
distance
0
speed
D
0
0
© UCLES 2019
time
0
0625/12/M/J/19
-193-
[Turn over
4
3
A heavy metal ball falls vertically downwards through air past four equally spaced levels J, K, L
and M.
metal ball
level J
level K
level L
level M
The times taken to fall from one level to the next are measured.
Where is the speed of the ball greatest and which time is shortest?
4
speed is
greatest between
time is
shortest between
A
J and K
J and K
B
J and K
L and M
C
L and M
J and K
D
L and M
L and M
Which row contains two correct statements about the mass and the weight of an object?
mass of an object
weight of an object
A
is measured using a measuring cylinder
is measured using a balance
B
is the gravitational force exerted on the object
is the amount of matter in the object
C
is measured in newtons
is measured in kilograms
D
is the same everywhere
can vary from place to place
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-194-
5
5
The table gives approximate values of the acceleration due to gravity and the atmospheric
pressure on three planets.
Earth
Venus
Mars
acceleration due to gravity
m / s2
10
9
4
atmospheric pressure / kPa
100
9000
1
A body has a mass of 10 kg on Earth.
Which statement about the weight of the body is correct?
6
A
The weight is greatest on Earth.
B
The weight is greatest on Mars.
C
The weight is greatest on Venus.
D
The weight is the same on each planet.
A metal has a density of 8.0 g / cm3. A solid cube of mass 1.0 kg is made from this metal.
How long is each side of the cube?
A
7
0.50 cm
B
2.0 cm
C
5.0 cm
D
42 cm
Which object is in equilibrium?
A
B
D
C
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
© UCLES 2019
2N
2N
2N
0625/12/M/J/19
-195-
[Turn over
6
8
A spring is suspended from a stand. Loads are added and the extensions are measured.
spring
stand
loads
rule
Which graph shows the result of plotting extension against load?
A
B
extension
extension
0
0
0
0
load
C
D
extension
extension
0
0
0
© UCLES 2019
load
0
load
0625/12/M/J/19
-196-
load
7
9
A wooden bar is pivoted at its centre so that it can rotate freely. Two equal forces F are applied to
the bar.
In which diagram is the turning effect greatest?
A
B
pivot
pivot
F
F
F
F
C
D
F
pivot
pivot
F
F
F
10 A machine is very efficient.
What does this mean?
A
It produces a large amount of power.
B
It uses very little energy.
C
It wastes very little energy.
D
It works very quickly.
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-197-
[Turn over
8
11 An object falls under gravity.
What happens to the gravitational potential energy and to the kinetic energy of the object?
gravitational potential
energy
kinetic energy
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
12 A student is testing four different electric motors. He measures the time it takes for a motor to lift
either a heavy load or a light load through a height of 1 metre.
motor
load
He makes a similar measurement for the other three motors.
The table shows his results.
Which motor produces the most power?
load
time taken / s
A
heavy
12
B
heavy
16
C
light
12
D
light
16
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-198-
9
13 The diagram shows a stone suspended on a string under the surface of a liquid. The stone
experiences a pressure caused by the liquid.
string
stone
liquid
What would increase the pressure on the stone?
A
decreasing the surface area of the stone
B
increasing the mass of the stone
C
lowering the stone deeper into the liquid
D
using a liquid with a lower density
14 A sample of mercury is heated.
In which states of matter will its volume increase as its temperature rises?
A
gas only
B
liquid and gas only
C
solid and liquid only
D
solid, liquid and gas
15 When water evaporates, what escapes from the surface of the water?
A
individual atoms
B
individual molecules
C
individual protons
D
tiny drops of water
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-199-
[Turn over
10
16 The resistance of a resistor varies linearly with temperature as shown on the graph.
120
resistance / Ω
110
100
90
80
70
60
–20
0
20
40
60
80
100
temperature / °C
Which statement is correct?
A
When immersed in boiling water, the resistance is 120 Ω.
B
The resistance at the lower fixed point is 80 Ω.
C
When the resistance is 100 Ω the temperature is 120 °C.
D
The resistor can only be used at temperatures between 0 °C and 100 °C.
17 A night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the
night. During the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.
Which thermal capacity and which night-time temperature increase will cause the most energy to
be stored by the block?
thermal capacity
of block
night-time
temperature increase
A
large
large
B
large
small
C
small
large
D
small
small
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-200-
11
18 Which row describes the process of condensation?
change of state
separation
of molecules
A
gas to liquid
decreases
B
gas to liquid
increases
C
liquid to gas
decreases
D
liquid to gas
increases
19 The metal surface of a kettle is hot.
What happens to the cool air outside the kettle when it comes into contact with the hot kettle?
A
The density of the air decreases and the air falls.
B
The density of the air decreases and the air rises.
C
The density of the air increases and the air falls.
D
The density of the air increases and the air rises.
20 Vacuum flasks usually have silvered walls that help to keep the contents of the flask hot.
Why are the walls silvered?
A
to absorb thermal energy from the air around the flask
B
to increase the rate of convection inside the flask
C
to reduce energy loss to the surroundings by conduction
D
to reflect thermal radiation back into the flask
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-201-
[Turn over
12
21 The diagrams show graphs of displacement against time for four waves. All the graphs are drawn
to the same scale.
Which wave has the largest amplitude and the highest frequency?
A
B
displacement
0
displacement
0
0
time
0
time
C
D
displacement
0
displacement
0
0
time
0
time
22 The diagram shows a cork with a weight attached so that the cork floats upright in water.
cork
X
Y
weight
Transverse waves travel across the water from X to Y.
In which direction do the waves make the cork move?
A
→ ← right and left
B
↑↓ up and down
C
→ only to the right
D
← only to the left
© UCLES 2019
water surface
0625/12/M/J/19
-202-
13
23 Which conditions are necessary for light to be totally internally reflected?
the incident light is in
angle of incidence
A
the less dense medium
less than the critical angle
B
the less dense medium
greater than the critical angle
C
the more dense medium
less than the critical angle
D
the more dense medium
greater than the critical angle
24 Which diagram shows the dispersion of white light by a glass prism?
A
B
red
red
white
red
violet
white
violet
D
C
red
white
violet
red
red
red
violet
violet
violet
white
violet
25 The diagram shows radiation from a lamp passing through a prism.
screen
prism
P
red light
radiation from
lamp
Which type of radiation is found at P?
A
γ-rays
B
infrared
C
ultraviolet
D
X-rays
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-203-
[Turn over
14
26 A pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. The sound travels through the water and is
reflected from a shoal of fish. The sound reaches the boat again after 1.2 s. The speed of sound
in the water is 1500 m / s.
boat
shoal of fish
How far below the bottom of the boat is the shoal of fish?
A
450 m
B
900 m
C
1800 m
D
3600 m
27 An observer stands at the finish line of a 100 m race. He wants to time the winner’s run. He starts
his stop-watch as soon as he sees the smoke from the starting gun instead of when he hears the
bang.
What is the reason for doing this?
A
Light travels much faster than sound.
B
There is a risk he might respond to an echo from a wall.
C
Humans react slower to sound than to light.
D
Humans react more quickly to sound than to light.
28 A soft iron bar is a long way from any magnetic field.
How can the material of the bar be described?
A
It is magnetic and strongly magnetised.
B
It is magnetic and unmagnetised.
C
It is non-magnetic and strongly magnetised.
D
It is non-magnetic and unmagnetised.
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-204-
15
29 An iron ball on a horizontal wooden table rolls near the north pole of a bar magnet which is lying
on the table.
Which diagram shows the most likely path of the ball, as seen from above the table?
A
magnet
B
magnet
S
S
N
N
ball
ball
C
magnet
D
magnet
S
S
N
N
ball
ball
stops
here
30 Diagram 1 shows two thin, uncharged strips of plastic.
Diagram 2 shows the same strips after they have been rubbed with a dry cloth.
strips
of plastic
strips
of plastic
diagram 1
diagram 2
Which row describes the charge on the strips after rubbing, and the force between the strips after
rubbing?
charge on strips
force between strips
A
opposite
attraction
B
opposite
repulsion
C
the same
attraction
D
the same
repulsion
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-205-
[Turn over
16
31 An ammeter and a voltmeter are used to determine the resistance of a resistor.
Which circuit diagram shows the ammeter and the voltmeter correctly connected?
A
B
C
D
A
V
V
A
V
R
R
R
A
R
A
V
32 The diagram shows a circuit.
What is connected in parallel with the thermistor?
A
heater
B
lamp
C
light-dependent resistor
D
variable resistor
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-206-
17
33 The circuit shows a relay being used to operate a mains lamp.
Two ammeters are labelled P and Q.
P
Q
A
A
mains
lamp
The variable resistor is used to vary the current in the relay coil. The mains lamp switches on
when there is a large enough current in the relay coil.
The graph shows how the reading on ammeter Q changes as the reading on ammeter P
increases.
0.20
reading on
0.15
ammeter Q / A
0.10
0.05
0.00
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60
reading on ammeter P / A
What is the minimum current needed in the relay coil to switch on the mains lamp?
A
0.15 A
© UCLES 2019
B
0.20 A
C
0.35 A
0625/12/M/J/19
-207-
D
0.60 A
[Turn over
18
34 A lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the potential difference (p.d.) across it can be varied
from 0 to 6 V.
Which circuit would be most suitable?
A
B
6V
6V
D
C
6V
6V
35 Which components are designed to improve the safe working of a mains electrical supply?
circuit
breaker
earth
wire
fuse
A
B
C
D
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-208-
19
36 A bar magnet is held near a solenoid. The coil is connected to a galvanometer.
solenoid
bar magnet
The magnet is moved into the coil of wire and then held stationary inside the coil.
Which graph shows how the induced electromotive force (e.m.f.) varies with time?
A
B
e.m.f.
C
e.m.f.
0
e.m.f.
0
0
e.m.f.
0
0
time
D
0
0
time
time
0
time
37 A wire XY lies between the poles of a magnet.
The diagram shows the upward force on the wire XY caused when there is an electric current in
the direction XY as shown.
X
current
force
N
S
Y
Three tests are made using this apparatus.
1
The current direction is reversed.
2
The N and S poles are swapped around.
3
The current is switched off.
Which will result in no change in the size of the force on the wire?
A
1 and 2 only
© UCLES 2019
B
1 only
C
2 only
0625/12/M/J/19
-209-
D
3 only
[Turn over
20
38 A simple model of the atom consists of small particles orbiting a central nucleus.
Which row is correct?
charge on
nucleus
charge on
orbiting particles
A
negative
negative
B
negative
positive
C
positive
negative
D
positive
positive
39 Which statement explains the meaning of the half-life of a radioactive isotope?
A
half the time taken for one nucleus of the isotope to decay
B
half the time taken for the isotope to decay completely
C
the time taken for half of the nuclei of the isotope to decay
D
the time taken for one nucleus of the isotope to split in half
40 The diagram shows a lead-lined box used for storing radioactive sources.
Why is the inside of the box lined with lead?
A
It helps the sources to stay radioactive for longer.
B
It makes the box heavier.
C
It makes the radioactive sources more stable.
D
It reduces the amount of radiation that can escape from the box.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2019
0625/12/M/J/19
-210-
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 0 7 8 1 8 0 9 9 1 3 *
0625/32
PHYSICS
May/June 2019
Paper 3 Theory (Core)
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 16 printed pages.
DC (CE/JG) 168103/5
© UCLES 2019
[Turn over
-211-
2
1
A student moves a model car along a bench.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the motion of the model car.
4.0
speed
m/s
B
3.0
2.0
C
A
1.0
0
D
0
5.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe the motion of the car in each of the sections A, B, C and D.
A
...........................................................................................................................................
B
...........................................................................................................................................
C
...........................................................................................................................................
D
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Determine the distance moved by the model car in the first five seconds.
distance = .................................................... m [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-212-
3
2
A bottle contains some oil.
(a) The mass of the oil and the bottle is 678 g. The mass of the empty bottle is 318 g.
Calculate the mass of the oil.
mass = ..................................................... g [1]
(b) Some of the oil from (a) is poured into measuring cylinder A. The rest of the oil is poured into
measuring cylinder B, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
cm3
cm3
250
250
200
200
150
150
100
oil
100
50
50
A
B
oil
Fig. 2.1
(i)
State the volume of oil in measuring cylinder B, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
volume = ................................................. cm3 [1]
(ii)
Calculate the total volume of oil.
volume = ................................................. cm3 [1]
(iii)
Calculate the density of the oil.
density = ............................................. g / cm3 [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-213-
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a simple pendulum swinging backwards and forwards between P and Q. One
complete oscillation of the pendulum is when the bob swings from P to Q and then back to P.
support
string
P
Q
R
pendulum bob
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student starts two stopwatches at the same time while the pendulum bob is swinging.
The student stops one stopwatch when the pendulum bob is at P. He stops the other
stopwatch when the pendulum bob next is at Q.
Fig. 3.2 shows the readings on the stopwatches.
reading at P
reading at Q
min
min
s
1 s
100
0 : 2 : 22
s
1 s
100
0 : 2 : 77
Fig. 3.2
(i)
Use readings from Fig. 3.2 to determine the time for one complete oscillation of the
pendulum.
time = ...................................................... s [2]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-214-
5
(ii)
The method described in (a) does not give an accurate value for one complete oscillation
of the pendulum.
Describe how the student could obtain an accurate value for one complete oscillation of
the pendulum.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) As the pendulum bob moves from R to Q it gains 0.4 J of gravitational potential energy.
Air resistance can be ignored.
State the value of kinetic energy of the pendulum bob at
1.
R
................................................ J
2.
Q
.................................................J
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-215-
[Turn over
6
4
A student places a balloon filled with air next to a window, as shown in Fig. 4.1. The Sun warms
the air in the balloon.
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i)
Suggest what happens to the balloon as the air in it becomes hotter than the surroundings.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Use ideas about molecules to explain your answer to (a)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The student uses a pump to inflate another balloon.
Fig. 4.2 shows the student inflating a balloon.
balloon
pump handle
Fig. 4.2
The student applies a force of 30 N to the pump handle. The force acts on an area of 12 cm2.
Calculate the pressure on the pump handle. Include the unit.
© UCLES 2019
pressure = ........................................................ [4]
[Total: 8]
0625/32/M/J/19
-216-
7
5
(a) A nuclear power station generates electrical energy.
The main stages in the operation of the nuclear power station are listed.
They are not in the correct order.
E
Electrical energy is produced.
F
The fission of uranium nuclei releases thermal energy.
G
A turbine drives a generator.
H
Thermal energy heats water to produce steam.
Complete the flow chart to describe how a nuclear power station works.
In each empty box, insert the letter for the correct statement.
The nuclear power station uses uranium as a fuel.
↓
↓
↓
The steam drives a turbine.
↓
↓
Electrical energy is transmitted.
[2]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-217-
[Turn over
8
(b) Electrical energy from the power station is used to power two different lamps. Fig. 5.1 shows
how the light outputs from two types of lamp vary with the power input.
1000
power input
to lamp / W
filament
lamp
800
600
400
200
0
LED
lamp
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
light output
J/s
Fig. 5.1
(i)
An experiment requires a lamp with a light output of 70 J / s.
For the LED lamp and for the filament lamp determine the input power required to give a
light output of 70 J / s. Use information from Fig. 5.1.
(ii)
1.
For the LED lamp, input power = .................... W
2.
For the filament lamp, input power = .................... W
[2]
Explain why using LED lamps is better for the environment. Use information from Fig. 5.1
in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-218-
9
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light that is reflected by a mirror.
YZ
ray of
light
mirror
line X
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i)
State the name of line X shown on Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State the name of angle Y shown on Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
A student moves the ray of light and doubles the size of angle Y. State the effect on
angle Z.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a converging lens used to form an image I of an object O.
object O
F
F
lens
image I
Fig. 6.2
(i)
State the name of the points labelled F on Fig. 6.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Describe the nature of the image I.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-219-
[Turn over
10
7
(a) Solid, liquid and gas are three states of matter.
For each state of matter describe the arrangement of the molecules.
solid ..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
liquid .........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
gas ............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A liquid is spilt on a bench in a warm laboratory. After a short time, the liquid disappears.
(i)
State the name of the process that causes the liquid to disappear.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The process in (b)(i) causes a cooling effect.
Explain why the cooling effect occurs. Use your ideas about molecules.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-220-
11
8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a bar magnet.
Fig. 8.1
(i)
On Fig. 8.1, mark the North and South poles of the magnet. Use the letter N for the North
pole and S for the South pole.
[1]
(ii)
A small bar of unmagnetised iron is placed next to a bar magnet, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
magnet
S
iron
bar
N
Fig. 8.2
The iron bar moves towards the magnet.
Explain why the iron bar moves.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-221-
[Turn over
12
(b) Fig. 8.3 shows a coil of wire wrapped around an iron core. A student uses these to make an
electromagnet.
coil
iron core
Fig. 8.3
(i)
Complete the diagram in Fig. 8.3 to show how it could be used to make an electromagnet.
[1]
(ii)
State one advantage of an electromagnet compared to a permanent magnet.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-222-
13
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a plastic ruler.
Fig. 9.1
(a) Suggest and explain how a student could give a positive charge to a plastic ruler.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A plastic ruler is given a positive charge. A sphere hangs from an insulating thread.
A student holds the ruler near the sphere, as shown in Fig. 9.2. The ruler repels the sphere.
insulating thread
positively
charged ruler
sphere
Fig. 9.2
(i)
State what charge, if any, the sphere carries.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-223-
[Turn over
14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows an incomplete circuit diagram for two identical lamps arranged in parallel. The
circuit contains an ammeter and a voltmeter.
Fig. 10.1
(a) On Fig. 10.1, complete the symbols for two lamps, an ammeter and a voltmeter positioned
correctly.
[5]
(b) One of the lamps breaks.
State the effect, if any, this has on the brightness of the other lamp. Explain your answer.
effect .........................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-224-
15
11
Fig. 11.1 shows a transformer that can provide two different output voltages from a 240 volt mains
a.c. supply.
P
240 V
a.c.
Q
R
primary coil
5000 turns
metal core
secondary coil
Fig. 11.1
In the transformer, the primary coil has 5000 turns.
The secondary coil has 250 turns between P and R.
(a) State the term used to describe this type of transformer.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The primary and secondary coils are mounted on a metal core.
State the metal used for the core and explain why it is suitable.
metal .........................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) (i)
The secondary coil has 125 turns between P and Q. Calculate the output voltage
between connections P and Q.
voltage = ..................................................... V [3]
(ii)
Compare the output voltage between P and Q with the output voltage between P and R.
Explain your answer.
comparison ........................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2019
explanation ........................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
0625/32/M/J/19
[Turn over
-225-
16
12 (a) Radioactive emission is a random process.
Explain the meaning of the word random.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The table compares three types of radioactive emission.
emission
relative ionising ability
relative penetrating ability
alpha
beta
gamma
Table 12.1
Complete the table by choosing words from the box.
high
low
medium
[3]
(c) A radioactive substance decays by emitting an α-particle.
4
An α-particle can be represented as 2 α.
Draw a labelled diagram showing the composition of an α-particle.
[3]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2019
0625/32/M/J/19
-226-
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 3 2 3 0 4 8 1 0 2 9 *
0625/62
PHYSICS
May/June 2019
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 12 printed pages.
DC (SC/CB) 171391/5
© UCLES 2019
[Turn over
-227-
2
1
A student is investigating moments using a balancing method.
Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus.
P
a
b
0
metre rule
Q
100
w
bench
pivot
Fig. 1.1
(a) The student places the metre rule, without the loads, on the pivot and adjusts its position
so that the metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced. She keeps the rule at this
position on the pivot throughout the experiment.
Explain briefly why this position on the pivot may not be exactly at the 50.0 cm mark of the
rule.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) She places a load P on the metre rule so that the edge that is furthest from the pivot is exactly
at the 10.0 cm mark on the rule.
She measures the distance a between this edge of the load P and the pivot, as shown in
Fig. 1.1.
She places a load Q on the metre rule and adjusts the position of load Q so that the metre
rule is as near as possible to being balanced.
She measures the distance b between the centre of load Q and the pivot, as shown in
Fig. 1.1.
She repeats the procedure, with the edge of the load P that is furthest from the pivot at the
15.0 cm, 20.0 cm, 25.0 cm and 30.0 cm marks. All the readings are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
© UCLES 2019
a / cm
b / cm
38.0
44.5
33.0
38.5
28.0
33.6
23.0
27.2
18.0
22.0
0625/62/M/J/19
-228-
3
Plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against b / cm (x-axis). Start both axes at the origin (0,0).
[4]
(c) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
necessary information.
G = ........................................................ [2]
(d) Determine the intercept C on the x-axis of the graph. This is the value of b when a = 0.
C = ........................................................ [1]
(e) On Fig. 1.2, measure the width w of the load P.
P
w
Fig. 1.2
w = ........................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2019
0625/62/M/J/19
-229-
[Turn over
4
(f)
Another student suggests that the value of the intercept C should be equal to half the width
w of the load P. State whether the results support the suggestion. Justify your answer by
reference to the results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(g) Suggest one practical reason why it is difficult to obtain accurate values for a and for b.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2019
0625/62/M/J/19
-230-
5
2
A student is investigating the rate of cooling of water under different conditions. A greater rate of
cooling occurs if there is a greater change in the temperature during the same period of time.
Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 show the apparatus used.
Beaker A has a lid. Beaker B is on a mat made of the same material as the lid. The mat and the lid
have the same thickness.
thermometer
lid
beaker A
Fig. 2.1
thermometer
beaker B
mat
Fig. 2.2
(a) The thermometer in Fig. 2.3 shows the room temperature θR at the beginning of the
experiment. Record θR.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
Fig. 2.3
θR = ........................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2019
0625/62/M/J/19
-231-
[Turn over
6
(b) The student pours 200 cm3 of hot water into beaker A. He places the lid on the beaker and
places the thermometer in the beaker, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
He records the temperature θ of the hot water at time t = 0. He immediately starts the
stopclock.
He records the time and temperature readings every 30 s until he has six sets of readings.
He repeats the procedure using beaker B. This beaker is on a mat but has no lid.
All the readings are shown in Table 2.1 and Table 2.2.
Table 2.1
Table 2.2
Beaker A, with lid
Beaker B, on a mat
t/
θ/
t/
θ/
0
81
0
83
30
80
30
82
60
79
60
80
90
78
90
79
120
77
120
78
150
76
150
77
(i)
Complete the column headings in Table 2.1 and in Table 2.2.
(ii)
Look carefully at the readings in Table 2.1 and in Table 2.2.
[1]
Tick the box to show your conclusion from the readings.
The lid reduces the rate of cooling of the water significantly more than the mat
reduces the rate of cooling of the water.
The mat reduces the rate of cooling of the water significantly more than the lid
reduces the rate of cooling of the water.
There is no significant difference between the lid and the mat in reducing the
rate of cooling of the water.
[1]
(iii)
Justify your conclusion by reference to the readings.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019
0625/62/M/J/19
-232-
7
(c) A student plans to repeat the experiment using the same apparatus and the same volume
of water. Suggest one change to the procedure that will decrease the rate of cooling of the
water.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) State one precaution that you must take in order to record accurate temperature readings.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) Suggest two variables that must be controlled in order to make the experiment a fair test.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(f)
It is important to view a measuring cylinder correctly to obtain an accurate value of the volume
of a liquid. Tick the box that gives the best description of how to read a measuring cylinder.
The line of sight should be along the scale.
The line of sight should be vertical.
The line of sight should be at right-angles to the scale.
The line of sight should be parallel to the scale.
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019
0625/62/M/J/19
-233-
[Turn over
8
3
A student is investigating electrical resistance.
She uses the circuit shown in Fig. 3.1.
power supply
A
P
L
V
Fig. 3.1
(a) Write down the readings shown on the meters in Figs. 3.2 and 3.3.
V1 = ..............................................................
I1 = ..............................................................
[2]
0
1
2
3 4
5 6 7
8
V
9
10
Fig. 3.2
0.2
0
0.4
0.6
A
Fig. 3.3
© UCLES 2019
0625/62/M/J/19
-234-
0.8
1.0
9
(b) Calculate the resistance R1 of the resistor P using the equation R1 =
V1
.
I1
R1 = ........................................................ [1]
(c) The student connects the voltmeter across the lamp L.
She records the potential difference V2 across the lamp L.
2.4 V
V2 = ..............................................................
Calculate the resistance R2 of the lamp L using the equation R2 =
V2
.
I1
R2 = ........................................................ [1]
(d) The student replaces the resistor P with the resistor Q.
She records the potential difference V3 across the resistor Q and the current I2 in the circuit.
3.5 V
V3 = ..............................................................
0.31 A
I2 = ..............................................................
(i)
Calculate the resistance R3 of the resistor Q using the equation R3 =
V3
.
I2
R3 = ........................................................ [1]
(ii)
State whether the results R1 and R3 suggest that resistor P and resistor Q have the same
value of resistance, within the limits of experimental accuracy. Justify your statement by
reference to your results.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2019
0625/62/M/J/19
-235-
[Turn over
10
(e) The student connects the voltmeter across the lamp L.
She records the potential difference V4 across the lamp L.
2.5 V
V4 = ..............................................................
She calculates the resistance R4 of the lamp L.
8.1 Ω
R4 = ..............................................................
She suggests that the change in resistance of the lamp from part (c) is due to a change in
temperature of the lamp filament. Suggest an observation that she could make to confirm that
the temperature of the lamp filament changes.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f)
Complete the circuit diagram in Fig. 3.4 to show that:
•
the two resistors and the lamp are all connected in parallel
•
the voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the resistors and
the lamp.
A
Fig. 3.4
[2]
(g) State the name of the circuit component that you would add to the circuit you have drawn to
control the current in the circuit.
......................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2019
0625/62/M/J/19
-236-
11
4
A student is investigating the relationship between the thickness of a converging (convex) lens
and its focal length. Fig. 4.1 shows the cross-section of a converging lens.
The focal length f of a lens can be calculated if u (the distance between the object and the lens)
and v (the distance between the lens and the image on a screen) are known.
The equation is:
f=
uv
(u + v)
t
Fig. 4.1
Plan an experiment to investigate the relationship between the thickness t and the focal length f of
converging lenses. You may add to Fig. 4.1 as part of your answer.
The following apparatus is available to the student:
illuminated object
selection of lenses of different thicknesses and a lens holder
screen
metre rule
30 cm ruler
two rectangular wooden blocks with the longest sides longer than the diameter of the lenses.
In your plan, you should:
•
draw a diagram to show the arrangement of the apparatus, labelling u and v
•
explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you
would take
•
explain briefly how you would determine the thickness t of each lens (you may draw a diagram
if it helps your explanation)
•
draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings
(you do not need to use the equation to calculate focal length).
© UCLES 2019
0625/62/M/J/19
-237-
[Turn over
12
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [7]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2019
0625/62/M/J/19
-238-
Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS
0625/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
May/June 2020
45 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.
*4118729190*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
• Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 40.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
IB20 06_0625_12/4RP
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
-239-
2
1
Five athletes P, Q, R, S and T compete in a race. The table shows the finishing times for the
athletes.
athlete
finishing time / s
P
Q
R
S
T
22.50
24.40
25.20
26.50
23.20
Which statement is correct?
2
A
Athlete P won the race and was 0.70 s ahead of the athlete in second place.
B
Athlete P won the race and was 1.90 s ahead of the athlete in second place.
C
Athlete S won the race and was 1.30 s ahead of the athlete in second place.
D
Athlete S won the race and was 2.10 s ahead of the athlete in second place.
The graph shows how the speed of an object varies with time.
At which labelled time is the acceleration greatest?
speed
0
3
0 A B
C
D
time
Which statement about acceleration is correct?
A
It is related to the changing speed of an object.
B
It is the distance an object travels in one second.
C
It is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.
D
It is the force acting on an object when it is near to the Earth.
© UCLES 2020
0625/12/M/J/20
-240-
3
4
Two metal blocks P and Q have identical dimensions. They hang on identical spring balances.
N
N
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
P
Q
Which statement about P and Q is correct?
5
A
They have different volumes and different weights.
B
They have different volumes and equal weights.
C
They have equal volumes and equal weights.
D
They have equal volumes and different weights.
A space probe is taken from the Earth to Mars.
The force of gravity on the surface of Mars is less than the force of gravity on the surface of the
Earth.
How do the weight and the mass of a space probe on the surface of Mars compare to their values
when the probe is on the surface of the Earth?
weight on Mars
mass on Mars
A
decreased
decreased
B
decreased
unchanged
C
unchanged
decreased
D
unchanged
unchanged
© UCLES 2020
0625/12/M/J/20
-241-
[Turn over
4
6
Water has a density of 1000 kg / m3.
A rectangular swimming pool has an average depth of 1.6 m.
The length of the pool is 25 m.
The width of the pool is 10 m.
What is the mass of the water in the swimming pool?
A
7
2.5 kg
B
400 kg
C
400 000 kg
D
800 000 kg
The diagram shows an extension–load graph for a spring.
10.0
extension / cm
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0
load / N
An empty can of weight 3.0 N is suspended from the spring.
Liquid is poured into the can until the extension is 8.0 cm.
What is the weight of the liquid?
A
4.0 N
© UCLES 2020
B
10.0 N
C
13.0 N
0625/12/M/J/20
-242-
D
16.0 N
5
8
9
What is meant by the moment of a force on an object?
A
the magnitude of the force on the object
B
the direction of the force on the object
C
the time for which the force acts on the object
D
the turning effect of the force on the object
Which energy resource is not renewable?
A
geothermal
B
nuclear fission
C
solar
D
wind
10 Two motors X and Y lift loads of the same weight through the same vertical distance.
Motor X is more efficient than motor Y.
Which statement about the motors is correct?
A
The useful energy output of motor X is larger than that of motor Y.
B
The useful energy output of motor X is smaller than that of motor Y.
C
The energy input of motor X is larger than that of motor Y.
D
The energy input of motor X is smaller than that of motor Y.
© UCLES 2020
0625/12/M/J/20
-243-
[Turn over
6
11 A man can either take an escalator or a lift to travel up between two floors in a hotel.
escalator
lift
The escalator takes 20 seconds to carry the man between the two floors. The useful work done
against gravity is W. The useful power developed is P.
The lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man between the same two floors.
How much useful work against gravity is done by the lift, and how much useful power is
developed by the lift?
useful work
done against
gravity by lift
useful power
developed by lift
A
more than W
less than P
B
more than W
P
C
W
less than P
D
W
P
© UCLES 2020
0625/12/M/J/20
-244-
7
12 The diagram shows a solid block resting on a bench. The dimensions of the block are shown.
40 cm
20 cm
Q
80 cm
R
P
bench
On which labelled surface should the block rest to produce the smallest pressure on the bench?
A
P
B
Q
C
R
D
P, Q and R produce the same pressure
13 A beaker contains a liquid.
liquid
X
On what does the liquid pressure at position X depend?
A
both the density of the liquid and the depth of X below the surface
B
both the surface area of the liquid and the depth of X below the surface
C
both the surface area of the liquid and the volume of the liquid
D
the depth of X below the surface only
14 Evaporation occurs from the surface of a pool of water.
Which statement describes this change of state?
A
Electrons move from the liquid and become a gas.
B
Molecules that move from the liquid have the same energy as those that stay in the liquid.
C
The more energetic molecules escape the liquid.
D
The more energetic molecules remain in the liquid.
© UCLES 2020
0625/12/M/J/20
-245-
[Turn over
8
15 A gas, in a sealed container, is compressed slowly so that its temperature does not change.
What happens to the molecules of the gas as a result of this compression?
A
The average speed of the molecules increases.
B
The average force in a collision between a molecule and the container increases.
C
There are more frequent collisions between molecules and the container.
D
The volume of each molecule decreases.
16 The diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
°C
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110
What is the temperature difference between the two fixed points on the Celsius scale?
A
10 °C
B
100 °C
C
110 °C
D
120 °C
17 A metal block is left overnight in a cool, shady room. In the morning, the metal block is moved
into warm surroundings.
Which statement about the metal block is correct in the morning?
A
The internal energy of the metal block increases.
B
The temperature of the metal block decreases.
C
Convection transfers energy throughout the metal block.
D
The metal contracts slightly.
18 The diagrams show four blocks of steel. The blocks are all drawn to the same scale.
The same quantity of thermal energy is given to each block.
Which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?
A
© UCLES 2020
B
C
0625/12/M/J/20
-246-
D
9
19 A room is heated by a radiator. The diagrams X and Y show two possible circulations of hot air,
which heat the room.
diagram X
ceiling
ceiling
diagram Y
radiator
radiator
floor
floor
Which diagram and reason explain the heating of the room by convection?
diagram
reason
A
X
air density decreases when air is heated
B
X
air density increases when air is heated
C
Y
air density decreases when air is heated
D
Y
air density increases when air is heated
20 Two similar liquid-in-glass thermometers P and Q are placed in direct sunlight.
The bulb of thermometer P is painted white. The bulb of thermometer Q is painted black.
How and why would the thermometer readings differ?
A
P would read higher than Q because black is a good absorber of radiation.
B
P would read higher than Q because black is a poor absorber of radiation.
C
P would read lower than Q because black is a good absorber of radiation.
D
P would read lower than Q because black is a poor absorber of radiation.
© UCLES 2020
0625/12/M/J/20
-247-
[Turn over
10
21 The diagram shows a wave.
8 cm
3 cm
6 cm
4 cm
What are the amplitude and the wavelength of this wave?
amplitude / cm
wavelength / cm
A
3
4
B
3
8
C
6
4
D
6
8
22 Waves travel more quickly on the surface of water when the water is deep.
A stone is dropped at point X into a pool of varying depth. The diagram shows the first three
wavefronts on the surface of the pool.
The region between X and which labelled point is likely to be the deepest?
B
wavefronts
A
X
C
D
© UCLES 2020
0625/12/M/J/20
-248-
11
23 The diagram shows a ray of light incident on the surface of a glass block.
1
2
3
glass block
4
The ray of light is partially reflected back into the air and partially refracted into the glass block.
Which row correctly identifies the angle of reflection and the angle of refraction?
angle of
reflection
angle of
refraction
A
1
3
B
1
4
C
2
3
D
2
4
24 A beam of light consists of yellow and blue light.
The beam of light is incident on a glass prism.
Which diagram is correct?
A
B
yellow
blue
blue
yellow
glass prism
glass prism
C
D
glass prism
© UCLES 2020
glass prism
blue
yellow
yellow
blue
0625/12/M/J/20
-249-
[Turn over
12
25 An intruder alarm sensor detects that a person is warmer than his surroundings.
Which type of electromagnetic wave does the sensor detect?
A
infrared
B
radio
C
ultraviolet
D
visible light
26 A dolphin sends out a sound wave. An echo returns 0.010 s later from a fish which is 7.5 m from
the dolphin.
What is the speed of the sound wave in water?
A
0.075 m / s
B
0.15 m / s
C
750 m / s
D
1500 m / s
27 The diagrams show two bar magnets which are attracting each other.
Which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern between the poles?
A
S
N
B
S
N
S
N
C
S
© UCLES 2020
N
S
N
S
N
D
S
N
S
0625/12/M/J/20
-250-
N
13
28 Four nails A, B, C and D are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.
One of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can
support is recorded.
nail
N
S
bar magnet
paper clips
The bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is
recorded. Each nail is tested individually.
Which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?
number of paper clips attached to the nail
bar magnet present
bar magnet removed
A
2
0
B
2
1
C
4
3
D
5
2
29 A cloth is used to rub an uncharged plastic rod.
Both the rod and the cloth become charged.
Why does the plastic rod become negatively charged and the cloth become positively charged?
A
The rod gains electrons and the cloth gains positive charges.
B
The rod gains electrons and the cloth loses electrons.
C
The rod loses electrons and the cloth gains electrons.
D
The rod loses electrons and the cloth loses positive charges.
© UCLES 2020
0625/12/M/J/20
-251-
[Turn over
14
30 The diagram shows a circuit. The wire between P and Q can be removed and replaced by a
circuit component.
P
R
S
Q
T
Where should a voltmeter be connected to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the
lamp?
A
between P and Q in place of the wire
B
in parallel with R and S
C
in parallel with R and T
D
in parallel with S and T
31 A student uses the circuit shown to determine the resistance of two identical resistors.
A
V
The voltmeter reading is 2.2 V and the ammeter reading is 0.25 A.
What is the resistance of each resistor?
A
0.275 Ω
© UCLES 2020
B
0.55 Ω
C
4.4 Ω
0625/12/M/J/20
-252-
D
8.8 Ω
15
32 The circuit shown contains five lamps J, K, L, M and N. All the lamps are glowing.
lamp L
lamp K
lamp J
lamp N
lamp M
One lamp is removed and two other lamps go out.
Which lamp is removed?
A
lamp J
B
lamp K
C
lamp L
D
lamp M
33 The diagram shows a control circuit. The lamp is lit.
The temperature of the surroundings increases.
What will happen to the brightness of the lamp?
A
It will be brighter.
B
It will be less bright.
C
It will not change.
D
It will become brighter and then less bright.
© UCLES 2020
0625/12/M/J/20
-253-
[Turn over
16
34 A student constructs four circuits, each containing a fuse.
The fuse blows in one circuit and both lamps in the circuit go out.
In which circuit does the fuse blow and both lamps go out?
A
B
C
D
35 The diagrams P, Q and R show three voltage–time graphs.
diagram P
diagram Q
+
voltage
+
voltage
0
0
time
0
time
0
–
–
diagram R
+
voltage
0
time
0
–
Which graphs show an alternating voltage?
A
P and Q only
© UCLES 2020
B
P and R only
C
Q and R only
0625/12/M/J/20
-254-
D
P, Q and R
17
36 The diagram shows a transformer.
core
primary coil
40 turns
secondary coil
40 000 turns
Which statement about this transformer is correct?
A
It can operate from a 12 V battery.
B
It has a core which is made of steel.
C
It steps the input voltage up by a factor of 1000.
D
It steps the input voltage down by a factor of 1000.
37 A nuclide of the element iron has the symbol shown.
56
26Fe
What does a neutral atom of this nuclide contain?
protons
neutrons
electrons
A
26
30
26
B
26
56
30
C
30
26
56
D
56
26
30
38 Which statement about the nuclei of all atoms is correct?
A
They all contain electrons.
B
They are all always stable.
C
They all contain protons and electrons.
D
They all have a positive charge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/12/M/J/20
-255-
[Turn over
18
39 A thin sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a radiation detector. The count
rate falls to a very low reading.
paper
detector
counter
source
From this result, which type of radiation is the source emitting?
A
α-particles
B
β-particles
C
γ-rays
D
X-rays
40 A radioactive isotope has a half-life of 120 minutes.
It emits radiation at a rate of 100 particles per second.
How long does it take for the rate of emission to fall to 25 particles per second?
A
30 minutes
© UCLES 2020
B
45 minutes
C
90 minutes
0625/12/M/J/20
-256-
D
240 minutes
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 7 7 7 7 9 4 0 3 1 9 *
PHYSICS
0625/32
May/June 2020
Paper 3 Theory (Core)
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (CJ/CB) 191838/3
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
-257-
2
1
Some students observe drops of water falling from a tap that leaks, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
(a) The students measure the time for 50 drops to fall from the tap. The time for 50 drops to fall is
20 s.
Calculate the average time between two drops falling.
average time = ..................................................... s [2]
(b) The students collect some drops of water.
(i)
The students measure the volume of the water they collect.
State the term for the equipment that is suitable for measuring the volume accurately.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
In a similar experiment, another student collects 0.21 kg of water.
Calculate the weight of this water.
weight of water = .................................................... N [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-258-
3
2
(a) Some students determine the speed of a car on a road. The students measure the time for
the car to travel 30 m along the road. The time is 5.4 s.
Calculate the average speed of the car.
average speed = ................................................ m / s [3]
(b) Another car moves at a constant speed of 16 m / s for 4.0 seconds. During the next 2.0 seconds,
the car decelerates from a speed of 16 m / s to a speed of 13 m / s. It then continues at a
constant speed of 13 m / s for 3.0 seconds.
On Fig. 2.1, plot the speed–time graph for the motion of the car during these 9.0 s.
speed
m/s
20
15
10
5
0
0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
time / s
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-259-
[3]
[Turn over
4
(c) A motorcycle accelerates as shown in Fig. 2.2. Calculate the distance the motorcycle travels
while it is accelerating. Use information from Fig. 2.2.
speed
m/s
40
30
20
10
0
0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
time / s
Fig. 2.2
distance travelled = .................................................... m [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-260-
5
3
Fig. 3.1 shows an archer pulling the string of a bow.
string
arrow
fingers
on string
hand
pushing
bow
archer
bow
Fig. 3.1
(a) The archer uses a force of 120 N. The force acts on an area of 0.5 cm2 on the archer’s fingers.
Calculate the pressure on the archer’s fingers.
pressure on fingers = ............................................ N / cm2 [3]
(b) The archer’s other hand is pushing the bow with the same force of 120 N. This force acts on a
larger area than the force in (a).
State whether the pressure on this hand is greater than, the same as or less than the pressure
on the fingers holding the string.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State the type of energy stored in the bow when the archer bends it as shown in Fig. 3.1.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-261-
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Match each description with the correct state of matter in Table 4.1.
Write the correct letter in Table 4.1.
A – Molecules move around freely and are far apart from each other.
B – Molecules vibrate about fixed positions.
C – Molecules move around randomly and are close to each other.
Table 4.1
state of matter
description
solids
liquids
gases
[2]
(b) Some students heat water in a beaker. They measure the temperature every minute. They
heat the water for 8 minutes until it boils, and then continue to heat it for a further 5 minutes.
Describe and explain how the temperature of the water changes during the 13 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-262-
7
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a ray of red light passing through a semicircular glass block.
air
ray of
red light
p
q
s
r
semicircular glass block
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i)
State the term for the dotted line shown in Fig. 5.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State which angle p, q, r or s is the angle of incidence for the ray of red light.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
State which angle p, q, r or s is the angle of refraction.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv)
State what happens to the speed of the red light as it enters the semicircular glass block
from the air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-263-
[Turn over
8
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the path of a ray of light entering a semicircular glass block. The critical angle
for the glass block is 42°.
On Fig. 5.2, continue the path of the ray. Show clearly its direction on leaving the glass block.
ray of light
62°
semicircular glass block
Fig. 5.2
[2]
(c) A ray of white light passes through two prisms as shown in Fig. 5.3.
prisms
D
E
F
ray of white light
Fig. 5.3
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-264-
9
Draw one line to link the letter for each position to the correct effect at that position.
position
effect
(i)
refraction
D
diffraction
total internal reflection
[1]
(ii)
reflection
E
dispersion
diffraction
[1]
(iii)
red, green and blue light
only produced
F
white light produced
spectrum of visible light
produced
[1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-265-
[Turn over
10
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a hot liquid in a vacuum flask. The vacuum flask keeps the temperature of the
liquid in the flask constant for a long time.
stopper
shiny silver surface
hot liquid
vacuum (space without particles)
shiny silver surface
Fig. 6.1
(a) Describe how each feature helps to keep the liquid hot for longer.
(i)
shiny silver surface
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
the vacuum between the silvered surfaces
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) (i)
Suggest a material for the stopper that will help to keep the liquid hot for longer.
material ....................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Give a reason for your answer.
reason ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-266-
11
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a diagram of the main regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. Two labels are
missing.
γ-rays
X-rays
ultraviolet
..................................
infrared
..................................
radio
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i)
(ii)
Complete the labels on Fig. 7.1.
[2]
State two properties that are the same for all waves in the electromagnetic spectrum.
1. ..............................................................................
2. ..............................................................................
[2]
(b) State which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used in each situation.
(i)
detecting objects without opening baggage at a security check
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
television remote control
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
satellite television transmissions
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-267-
[Total: 7]
[Turn over
12
8
Sound travels as a wave.
(a) Complete each sentence.
Sound is produced when an object .............................. .
An echo is produced when sound is .............................. from a hard surface.
Compared with a quiet sound, a loud sound always has a greater ........................... .
Compared with a high pitched sound, a low pitched sound always has a smaller ....................... .
Waves transfer energy without transferring ............................................................................. .
[5]
(b) State the meaning of the term ultrasound.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-268-
13
9
Some students plot the magnetic field lines around a bar magnet. They have the apparatus shown
in Fig. 9.1 and a large sheet of paper.
bar magnet
plotting compass
pencil
Fig. 9.1
(a) Describe how the students use the apparatus in Fig. 9.1 to show the pattern of the magnetic
field lines around the bar magnet.
You may draw a diagram to assist with your description.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Draw at least four lines above and below the bar magnet in Fig. 9.2 to show the magnetic
field around the bar magnet. Draw an arrow on the field lines to show the direction of the
magnetic field.
N
S
Fig. 9.2
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-269-
[Turn over
14
10 A student connects three identical lamps J, K and L in a circuit, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
Switch S1 is open and the current in ammeter A1 = 0.2 A.
A1
K
A2
J
A3
L
S1
Fig. 10.1
Use words from the box to complete the sentences.
Each word may be used once, more than once, or not at all.
the same
increased
decreased
(a) The switch S1 in Fig. 10.1 is closed. State and explain the effect on the circuit.
(i)
(ii)
The current in ammeter A1 is ............................ because the resistance of the whole
circuit is ............................ .
[2]
The current in ammeter A2 is ............................ .
[1]
(b) A student measures the potential difference (p.d.) across lamp J by using a voltmeter.
On Fig. 10.1, draw the correct electrical symbol for the voltmeter with the correct connections.
[2]
(c) The p.d. across lamp J is 3.0 V and the current shown by ammeter A3 is 0.15 A.
Calculate the resistance of lamp J. Include the unit in your answer.
resistance of lamp J = ..................... unit..................... [4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-270-
15
11
A model train uses an electric motor. The motor has a coil of wire in a magnetic field.
(a) Fig. 11.1 shows a coil of wire in a magnetic field.
north pole
N
south pole
S
current
coil of
wire
Fig. 11.1
Describe two ways of increasing the turning effect on the coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The motor for the model train uses an alternating voltage of 12 V. This is supplied by the
secondary coil of a transformer.
The primary coil of the transformer is connected to a mains voltage of 240 V.
The primary coil has 900 turns.
Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns on the secondary coil = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-271-
[Turn over
16
12 (a) Carbon-14 is a radioactive isotope of carbon. An atom of carbon-14 has 6 protons in its
nucleus.
Another isotope of carbon is carbon-12.
(i)
Determine the number of protons in a carbon-12 nucleus.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Determine the number of neutrons in a carbon-14 nucleus.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Determine the number of electrons orbiting the nucleus of a single carbon-14 atom.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Carbon-14 decays by emitting a β-particle.
State what happens to a nucleus of carbon-14 when it emits a β-particle.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) People working with radioactive sources need to take safety precautions.
(i)
A shielding material can absorb ionising radiation and reduce the damage to living tissue.
State a suitable material that will absorb all types of naturally occurring nuclear radiation.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Apart from using shielding, state how a person can reduce the amount of ionising
radiation they absorb when they handle samples of radioactive substances.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/32/M/J/20
-272-
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 1 9 2 4 7 0 8 6 8 *
PHYSICS
0625/62
May/June 2020
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
1 hour
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 40.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (LK/SW) 195016/2
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
-273-
2
1
A student investigates the period of a pendulum. Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2 show the apparatus she
uses.
clamp
clamp
d
bob
one complete
oscillation
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2
(a) Explain briefly, with the help of a diagram, how you would use a metre rule and set square to
measure the length d of a pendulum as accurately as possible.
Diagram:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The student adjusts the pendulum so that d = 50.0 cm. She displaces the bob slightly and
releases it so that it swings. Fig. 1.2 shows one complete oscillation of the pendulum.
She measures the time t1 for 20 complete oscillations.
(i)
Record the time t1 shown in Fig. 1.3.
m
1
s 100 s
Fig. 1.3
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-274-
t1 = ..................................................... [1]
3
(ii)
Calculate the period T1 of the pendulum. The period is the time for one complete
oscillation.
T1 = ..................................................... [1]
(c) The student adjusts the pendulum until the distance d is 100.0 cm.
She repeats the procedure and records the time t2 for 20 oscillations and the period T2.
39.80 s
t2 = ...........................................................
1.99 s
T2 = ...........................................................
She measures the mass mA of the pendulum bob. The reading on the balance is shown in
Fig. 1.4.
bob
g
Fig. 1.4
Record mass mA of the pendulum bob to the nearest gram.
mA = .................................................. g [1]
The student repeats the procedure using a pendulum bob of mass mB.
109 g
mB = ...........................................................
She obtains these results:
50.0 cm
distance d = ...........................................................
1.39 s
period T3 = ...........................................................
100.0 cm
distance d = ...........................................................
2.02 s
period T4 = ...........................................................
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-275-
[Turn over
4
(d) (i)
Using the results T1, T2, T3 and T4, for the period of each of the pendulums, tick (3) the
response that matches your results within the limits of experimental accuracy.
the period T is affected by d only
the period T is affected by both d and m
the period T is affected by m only
the period T is not affected by d or m
(ii)
[1]
Justify your answer to (d)(i) by reference to the results.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) The student now investigates the effect of the size of the oscillations on the period of the
pendulum.
(i)
Suggest briefly how you would measure the size of an oscillation. You may draw a
diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
State one variable that you would keep constant during this part of the investigation.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-276-
5
2
A student determines the resistance of a resistance wire.
Fig. 2.1 shows the circuit he uses.
power supply
A
resistance
wire
l
B
sliding
contact C
V
Fig. 2.1
(a)
•
The student places the sliding contact C on the resistance wire at a distance l = 10.0 cm
from B.
•
Record, in the first row of Table 2.1, the potential difference V across the length
l = 10.0 cm of resistance wire, as shown on the voltmeter in Fig. 2.2.
2
1
0.2
3
0
0.6
0.4
0.8
1.0
0
V
A
Fig. 2.2
Fig. 2.3
•
Record, in the first row of Table 2.1, the current I in the circuit as shown in Fig. 2.3.
•
Complete the column headings in Table 2.1.
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-277-
[Turn over
6
Table 2.1
l/
V/
I/
30.0
0.7
0.30
50.0
1.1
0.27
70.0
1.5
0.28
90.0
2.1
0.29
10.0
[3]
(b) The student repeats the procedure using l = 30.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 70.0 cm and 90.0 cm. The
readings are shown in Table 2.1.
Plot a graph of V / V (y-axis) against l / cm (x-axis). Start both axes at the origin (0,0).
[4]
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-278-
7
(c) (i)
Write a conclusion about the value of the current I in the circuit as the position of the
sliding contact C is changed.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Justify your conclusion by reference to your results.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Using the graph, determine the potential difference VL when the length l = 60.0 cm.
Show clearly on the graph how you obtained your result.
VL = ..................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-279-
[Turn over
8
3
A student investigates some thermal properties of sand and water.
Fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus.
thermometer
beaker
bench
Fig. 3.1
(a) The thermometer in Fig. 3.2 shows the room temperature θS at the beginning of the
experiment. Record θS.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
Fig. 3.2
θS = ................................................... °C [1]
(b) The student is supplied with hot water at a temperature θH. She records the temperature of
the hot water.
84 °C
θH = ...........................................................
She pours 100 cm3 of hot water into a beaker that contains sand. Initially, the sand is at room
temperature.
She measures the highest temperature θM of the mixture.
70 °C
θM = ...........................................................
(i)
Calculate the rise in temperature θR of the sand using the equation θR = (θM – θS).
θR = ................................................. °C [1]
(ii)
Explain briefly what the student does after pouring the hot water into the sand and before
taking the temperature, in order to obtain a reliable value for θM.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-280-
9
(iii)
Calculate the fall in temperature θF of the hot water using the equation θF = (θH – θM).
θF = ...................................................... °C
θ
Calculate the ratio S using the equation S = R . Give your answer to a suitable number
θF
of significant figures for this experiment.
S = ..................................................... [1]
(c) The student pours 100 cm3 of the hot water into a clean beaker that contains 100 cm3 of water
at room temperature. She records the highest temperature θM of the mixture.
49° C
θM = ...........................................................
Calculate the rise in temperature θR of the cold water using the equation θR = (θM – θS). Use
the value of room temperature θS recorded in (a).
θR = ...........................................................
Calculate the fall in temperature θF of the hot water using the equation θF = (θH – θM).
θF = ...........................................................
Calculate the ratio W using the equation W =
θR
.
θF
W = ..................................................... [2]
(d) The student studies the thermal properties of sand and water. She predicts that S should be
equal to 6 × W.
State whether the results support the prediction. Justify your answer by reference to the
readings.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-281-
[Turn over
10
(e) Suggest two temperatures that it would be sensible to keep constant when carrying out the
experiments.
1. ................................................................
2. ................................................................
(f)
[2]
The student measures the volume of the dry sand using a measuring cylinder before carrying
out the experiment. Tick (3) the boxes that show the precautions that she should take in
order to obtain an accurate reading.
Take the reading at the bottom of the meniscus.
Tap the measuring cylinder to make sure the top of the sand is horizontal.
View the scale of the measuring cylinder at right angles.
[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-282-
11
4
A student investigates the bending of 1 m length strips of different materials. She compares how
far they bend when loaded at one end.
Plan an experiment to investigate how the material from which the strips are made affects the
bending of the strips when loaded at one end.
The following apparatus is available to the student:
strips of wood, plastic, steel and aluminium, each of length 1 m
a set of slotted masses
a metre rule
a G-clamp (used to hold the strips to the laboratory bench).
Other apparatus normally available in a school laboratory can also be used.
In your plan, you should:
•
draw a diagram to show the arrangement of the apparatus
•
explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you
would take
•
state the key variables to be kept constant
•
draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings
(you are not required to enter any readings in the table)
•
explain how you would use the results to reach a conclusion.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-283-
[Turn over
12
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [7]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/62/M/J/20
-284-
Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS
0625/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
May/June 2021
45 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.
*7603003757*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
 There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.
 Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 40.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 20 pages.
IB21 06_0625_12/4RP
© UCLES 2021
[Turn over
-285-
2
1
2
Which piece of apparatus is the most suitable for measuring the mass of a pencil sharpener?
A
digital balance
B
measuring cylinder
C
newton meter
D
ruler
A cyclist records his speed and the distance travelled during a journey.
He then plots the data against time for different sections of his journey.
Which graph shows a section when he is moving with constant speed?
A
B
distance
speed
0
0
time
0
D
C
distance
speed
0
0
© UCLES 2021
time
0
0
time
0
0625/12/M/J/21
-286-
time
3
3
Two stones of different weights fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored.
What will happen and why?
4
what will happen
why
A
Both stones hit the floor at the same time.
Acceleration of free fall is constant.
B
Both stones hit the floor at the same time.
They fall at constant speed.
C
The heavier stone hits the floor first.
Acceleration increases with weight.
D
The heavier stone hits the floor first.
Speed increases with weight.
Diagram 1 shows a sealed plastic bottle containing a hollow glass sphere and a steel ball.
Diagram 2 shows the same bottle after it has been shaken.
Diagram 3 shows the same bottle after it has been shaken again until the broken glass is in tiny
pieces.
sealed
plastic
bottle
hollow
glass
sphere
steel ball
diagram 1
broken
glass
steel ball
tiny pieces
of broken
glass
steel ball
diagram 2
diagram 3
The mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 1 is m1.
The mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 2 is m2.
The mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 3 is m3.
Which statement gives the correct relation between m1, m2 and m3?
A
m1 is equal to m2 and m2 is equal to m3.
B
m1 is greater than m2 and m2 is greater than m3.
C
m1 is less than m2 and m2 is greater than m3.
D
m1 is less than m2 and m2 is less than m3.
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-287-
[Turn over
4
5
An astronaut wants to know how much she would weigh on different moons.
She measures her mass on Earth to be 82 kg. She researches the values of g on different moons
and uses these values to calculate her weight.
The results are shown.
Which weight is calculated correctly?
6
name
of moon
g
N / kg
calculated
weight / N
A
Callisto
1.2
68
B
Charon
0.28
23
C
Dione
0.23
2.3
D
Umbriel
0.23
0.0028
A measuring cylinder contains 40 cm3 of water.
A stone of mass 94 g is lowered into the water so that it is fully submerged as shown.
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
90
80
70
What is the density of the stone?
A
1.1 g / cm3
© UCLES 2021
B
1.2 g / cm3
C
2.1 g / cm3
0625/12/M/J/21
-288-
D
2.6 g / cm3
5
7
A toy car travels down a sloping ramp at constant speed.
toy car
Which statement about the forces acting on the car is correct?
8
A
There are no forces acting on the car vertically.
B
There is no resultant force acting on the car.
C
There is no gravitational force acting on the car.
D
There is no frictional force acting on the car.
The extension–load graph for a spring is shown. The unstretched length of the spring is 17.0 cm.
3
extension / cm
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
load / N
When an object is suspended from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2 cm.
What is the weight of the object?
A
1.4 N
© UCLES 2021
B
1.6 N
C
2.6 N
0625/12/M/J/21
-289-
D
3.0 N
[Turn over
6
9
An object is falling through a vacuum.
Which energy transfer is taking place?
A
gravitational potential to kinetic
B
gravitational potential to thermal
C
kinetic to gravitational potential
D
kinetic to thermal
10 This question is about four methods used to produce electrical energy.
Which method has a correct description?
method
energy source
is renewable
emits
carbon dioxide
A
a hydroelectric power station
yes
no
B
a coal-fired power station
no
no
C
a wind turbine
no
yes
D
a nuclear power station
yes
yes
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-290-
7
11 Two men, X and Y, try to move identical heavy boxes, P and Q.
Man X tries to push box P along the floor. The box does not move because an object is in the
way.
Man Y lifts box Q from the floor onto a shelf.
shelf
man X
box P
man Y
direction
of force
object
box Q
direction of force
Which man does the most work on their box, and which box gains the most energy?
man doing
most work
box gaining
most energy
A
X
P
B
X
Q
C
Y
P
D
Y
Q
12 A book has a mass of 400 g.
The surface of the book in contact with a table has dimensions 0.10 m  0.20 m.
The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
What is the pressure exerted on the table due to the book?
A
0.08 N / m2
© UCLES 2021
B
8.0 N / m2
C
20 N / m2
0625/12/M/J/21
-291-
D
200 N / m2
[Turn over
8
13 The diagrams show three containers, P, Q and R.
P
Q
R
Each container contains the same liquid.
The depth of the liquid is the same in each container.
Which statement about the pressure of the liquid at the bottom of the container is correct?
A
The pressure of the liquid at the base of P is greatest.
B
The pressure of the liquid at the base of Q is greatest.
C
The pressure of the liquid at the base of R is greatest.
D
The pressures of the liquid at the bases of P, Q and R are the same.
14 A person taking a shower notices that water appears on the inside of the bathroom window, even
though the window is some distance from the shower.
Which statement explains this observation?
A
Droplets of water from the hot shower move through the air and onto the window.
B
The colder window causes the steam in the atmosphere to solidify.
C
Water vapour from the atmosphere condenses onto the colder window.
D
The hot water boils and turns into steam.
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-292-
9
15 Very small pollen grains are suspended in water. A bright light shines from the side.
When looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,
jerky manner.
eye
microscope
bright light
pollen grains
in water
What are the moving specks of light?
A
pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains
B
pollen grains being hit by water molecules
C
water molecules being hit by other water molecules
D
water molecules being hit by pollen grains
16 A hole is drilled in a metal plate.
What happens to the length of the plate and to the diameter of the hole when the plate is cooled?
length of plate
diameter of hole
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-293-
[Turn over
10
17 A liquid-in-glass thermometer uses alcohol as its liquid.
Which property of alcohol is used to measure the temperature?
A
boiling point
B
colour
C
thermal capacity
D
volume
18 The thermal capacity of object Y is greater than that of object Z.
What is a consequence of this?
A
Object Y needs less thermal energy to melt it than object Z.
B
Object Y needs less thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1 C than object Z.
C
Object Y needs more thermal energy to melt it than object Z.
D
Object Y needs more thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1 C than object Z.
19 The table gives some examples of convection and an explanation of why the convection occurs.
Which row is correct?
example
explanation
A
air conditioner unit
The unit is placed in a high position to circulate the cold air
rising from the floor level and so keeping the room cold.
B
convection oven
The air in the oven becomes more dense when
heated so it falls to the bottom heating the food faster.
C
hot-air balloon
Air inside the balloon becomes less dense
which causes the balloon to rise.
D
land and sea breezes
A breeze forms due to the warm air
above the land moving down towards the sea.
20 In which situation is radiation the main method by which energy is transferred?
A
heating a pan of water using a gas camping stove
B
energy reaching the Earth from the Sun
C
heating the air in a room with a radiator
D
giving gravitational potential energy to a glider when it is lifted by thermal currents
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-294-
11
21 Which diagram shows waves diffracting?
A
B
C
D
22 Which statement about the image of an object formed in a plane mirror is correct?
A
It is smaller than the object.
B
It is the same size as the object.
C
It is larger than the object.
D
It is inverted.
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-295-
[Turn over
12
23 An object is placed in front of a thin converging lens.
The diagram shows the paths of two rays from the top of the object.
converging lens
object
An image of the object is formed on a screen to the right of the lens.
How does this image compare with the object?
A
It is larger and inverted.
B
It is larger and the same way up.
C
It is smaller and inverted.
D
It is smaller and the same way up.
24 The table shows information about different colours of light.
colour
of light
frequency
/ Hz
violet
7.2  1014
blue
6.3  1014
yellow
5.2  1014
red
4.5  1014
Using the data, what is the frequency of orange light?
A
4.0  1014 Hz
B
5.0  1014 Hz
C
6.0  1014 Hz
D
7.0  1014 Hz
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-296-
13
25 Sound is a transfer of energy from an oscillating source.
Which statement describes how sound energy is transferred?
A
a longitudinal wave with the oscillation parallel to the direction in which energy is transferred
B
a longitudinal wave with the oscillation perpendicular to the direction in which energy is
transferred
C
a transverse wave with the oscillation parallel to the direction in which energy is transferred
D
a transverse wave with the oscillation perpendicular to the direction in which energy is
transferred
26 The diagrams represent the waves produced by four sources of sound. The scales are the same
for all the diagrams.
Which sound has the highest frequency?
A
time
B
time
C
time
D
time
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-297-
[Turn over
14
27 Two metal rods each have a painted end. The painted ends are placed next to the N pole and
S pole of a bar magnet in turn.
N
S
The rods are made from iron, aluminium or magnetised steel.
rod
placed next to
observation
1
N pole of bar magnet
attracts
1
S pole of bar magnet
attracts
2
N pole of bar magnet
nothing happens
2
S pole of bar magnet
nothing happens
What are rod 1 and rod 2 made from?
rod 1
rod 2
A
magnetised steel
aluminium
B
iron
magnetised steel
C
aluminium
iron
D
iron
aluminium
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-298-
15
28 Three piles of small nails, P, Q and R, are placed on a bench below three electromagnets.
One set of nails is made of copper, one of soft iron and one of steel.
Diagram 1 shows the situation when the electromagnets are switched on.
Diagram 2 shows the situation when the electromagnets are then switched off.
diagram 1
the switches are closed
Q
P
R
bench
small nails
diagram 2
the switches are open
R
small nails
P
Q
bench
Which row correctly identifies the materials from which the nails are made?
copper
soft iron
steel
A
P
Q
R
B
P
R
Q
C
Q
P
R
D
Q
R
P
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-299-
[Turn over
16
29 A student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.
The rod becomes positively charged.
What has happened to the rod?
A
It has gained electrons.
B
It has gained protons.
C
It has lost electrons.
D
It has lost protons.
30 A student connects a circuit with a resistor X. The reading on the ammeter is 2.0 A.
The reading on the voltmeter is 6.0 V.
A
X
V
She needs to produce a circuit with a total resistance of 10 .
Which resistor should she add in series to the circuit?
A
2
© UCLES 2021
B
3
C
7
0625/12/M/J/21
-300-
D
10 
17
31 The diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, an ammeter, three switches, S1, S2 and S3, and
three identical lamps.
A
S1
S2
S3
With only switch S1 closed, the reading on the ammeter is 0.04 A.
Which row states the incorrect ammeter reading for the switch conditions given?
switch S1
switch S2
switch S3
ammeter
reading / A
A
open
open
open
0.00
B
open
closed
open
0.04
C
open
open
closed
0.08
D
closed
closed
closed
0.12
32 Two 10  resistors are connected in series and then in parallel.
What is the combined resistance in each case?
resistance in
series / 
resistance in
parallel / 
A
10
5
B
10
10
C
20
5
D
20
10
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-301-
[Turn over
18
33 The information on the back of a television is shown.
220–240 V
~50 Hz
0.6 A
Which fuse provides the best protection for the circuit?
A
0.5 A
B
1A
C
5A
D
13 A
34 A solenoid is connected to a very sensitive ammeter. A rod is inserted into one end of the
solenoid. The ammeter shows that there is a small electric current in the solenoid while the rod is
moving.
solenoid
rod
A
Which rod is being inserted?
A
a heated copper rod
B
a magnetised steel rod
C
an uncharged nylon rod
D
a radioactive uranium rod
35 The diagram shows a transformer.
iron core
550 turns
115 turns
output
voltage
22 000 V
What is the output voltage?
A
0.35 V
© UCLES 2021
B
2.9 V
C
4600 V
0625/12/M/J/21
-302-
D
105 000 V
19
36 The diagram shows a d.c. motor.
coil
magnet
N
S
split-ring commutator
carbon brush
battery
Which two changes together will always make the coil spin more slowly?
A
Decrease the current in the coil and use a magnet of less strength.
B
Decrease the current in the coil and increase the number of turns on the coil.
C
Increase the current in the coil and use a magnet of less strength.
D
Increase the current in the coil and decrease the number of turns on the coil.
37 The charge on a proton is e.
What is the charge on an electron and what is the charge on a neutron?
electron
neutron
A
e
e
B
e
0
C
–e
–e
D
–e
0
38 The proton numbers and nucleon numbers of four nuclides are shown.
231
88Ra
232
90Th
238
92U
239
94Pu
Which statement is correct?
A
Plutonium (Pu) contains one more proton then uranium (U).
B
Thorium (Th) contains one more neutron than radium (Ra).
C
Thorium (Th) contains one more proton than radium (Ra).
D
Uranium (U) contains one more neutron than plutonium (Pu).
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-303-
[Turn over
20
39 A radioactive atom decays by emission of a -particle.
Which row is correct?
what decays
what happens to the atom
A
the nucleus of the atom
it becomes a different element
B
the nucleus of the atom
it becomes a lighter version of the same element
C
the outer layers of the atom
it becomes a different element
D
the outer layers of the atom
it becomes a lighter version of the same element
40 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.
120
activity
counts / s 90
60
30
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
time / minutes
What is the half-life of the source?
A
1.0 minute
B
2.0 minutes
C
2.5 minutes
D
4.0 minutes
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2021
0625/12/M/J/21
-304-
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 8 0 0 3 6 7 0 8 3 *
PHYSICS
0625/32
May/June 2021
Paper 3 Theory (Core)
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (DH/FC) 198581/4
© UCLES 2021
[Turn over
-305-
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the core of a transformer. It is made from thin sheets of iron.
core of transformer
50 mm
thin sheet of iron
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)
(a) There are 200 sheets of iron in the core of the transformer. The thickness of the core is 50 mm.
Calculate the average thickness of one sheet of iron.
average thickness of one sheet = .................................................. mm [3]
(b) The density of the iron in the core is 7.65 g / cm3. The mass of the core is 1377 g.
Calculate the volume of the core.
volume = .................................................. cm3 [3]
(c) State the name of a device used to measure mass.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-306-
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows how the speed of a car varies between 0 and 60.0 s.
40.0
speed
m/s
30.0
20.0
10.0
0
0
10.0
20.0
30.0
40.0
50.0
60.0
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(a) Determine the speed of the car using information from Fig. 2.1:
(i)
when the time is 5.0 s
speed = ................................................. m / s [2]
(ii)
when the car is moving with a constant speed.
speed = ................................................. m / s [1]
(b) Describe how the speed of the car changes between 30.0 s and 60.0 s.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Determine the distance travelled by the car between 10.0 s and 30.0 s.
distance travelled = ..................................................... m [3]
(d) The total distance travelled by the car in the last 30.0 s is 226 m.
Calculate the average speed of the car in the last 30.0 s.
average speed = ................................................. m / s [3]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-307-
[Total: 11]
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a barrier used at a car park. The beam can be raised and lowered by a man
rotating it about its pivot.
heavy weight
pivot
1.8 m
W
beam
150 N
Fig. 3.1 (not to scale)
(a) The weight of the beam is 150 N. This acts at a distance of 1.8 m from the pivot as shown in
Fig. 3.1.
Calculate the moment of the weight of the beam about the pivot.
Include the correct unit in your answer.
moment of weight of beam = ................................ unit ................. [4]
(b) When the weight W of the heavy weight acts at a distance of 0.6 m from the pivot, the barrier
is horizontal and balanced as shown in Fig. 3.1.
The man raises the barrier and the heavy weight slips to a distance of 0.8 m from the pivot.
This causes a problem for the man trying to lower the barrier.
Describe and explain the problem this causes for the man lowering the barrier.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-308-
5
4
A student investigates energy changes when a ball rolls down a curved track.
The student holds the ball at a starting point on the curved track, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
starting point
curved track
stopping point
table top
Fig. 4.1
The ball is released. It rolls down the track, up the other side to the stopping point and then back
down again.
(a) Describe the energy changes that take place as the ball rolls from the starting point to the
stopping point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) The height of the stopping point is less than the height of the starting point.
Describe how the principle of conservation of energy explains the difference between the
height of the stopping point and the height of the starting point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-309-
[Turn over
6
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a device connected to a gas cylinder. The device is used to measure the pressure
of the gas inside the cylinder.
gas from
cylinder
7.0 cm
7.0 cm
mercury
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i)
State the name of the device shown in Fig. 5.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The atmospheric pressure is equal to 75 cm of mercury.
Determine the pressure of the gas in the cylinder. Use information from Fig. 5.1.
pressure of gas = ................................ cm of mercury [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-310-
7
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows two identical heavy stone tiles placed on soft ground. One is vertical and the
other is horizontal.
vertical tile
horizontal tile
soft ground
Fig. 5.2
One of the tiles sinks into the soft ground.
State and explain which tile sinks into the soft ground.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-311-
[Turn over
8
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
bulb made from thin glass
90
100
110 °C
narrow tube
Fig. 6.1
(i)
State the temperature indicated on the thermometer in Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain why:
1.
the bulb is made from thin glass
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2.
the tube, along which the liquid expands, is narrow.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-312-
9
(b) A substance cools from 40 °C to –20 °C.
The substance takes 40 minutes to cool from 40 °C to its melting point of –12 °C. The
substance then takes 20 minutes to freeze.
On Fig. 6.2, sketch a temperature–time graph as the substance cools from 40 °C to –20 °C.
60
temperature / °C
40
20
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80 time / minutes
–20
– 40
Fig. 6.2
[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-313-
[Turn over
10
7
(a) Both radio waves and γ-rays (gamma) are radiations in the electromagnetic spectrum. Fig. 7.1
shows the main regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. Most regions are labelled.
radio
waves
microwave
radiation
infrared
radiation
visible light
...................
...................
...................
...................
γ-rays
Fig. 7.1
(i)
On Fig. 7.1, write the names of the radiations in the other two parts of the electromagnetic
spectrum.
[2]
(ii)
State one use of γ-rays.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
A star emits radio waves and γ-rays at the same time. They all travel across the vacuum
of space to the Earth’s atmosphere.
State whether the radio waves or the γ-rays, if either, arrive first at the Earth’s atmosphere.
Give a reason for your answer.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
reason ......................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-314-
11
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows pulses of a signal from a star.
amplitude
of signal
0
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
time / s
Fig. 7.2
(i)
Use the graph in Fig. 7.2 to determine the time between pulses.
time between pulses = ...................................................... s [2]
(ii)
Determine the frequency of the pulses in Fig. 7.2.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-315-
[Turn over
12
8
A student uses a semicircular glass block to investigate refraction.
(a) He shines a ray of red light into the block, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
X is the middle of the flat surface.
flat
surface
air
glass
X
ray of
red light
Fig. 8.1
(i)
On Fig. 8.1, draw the normal where the ray meets the flat surface at X.
[1]
(ii)
On Fig. 8.1, label the angle of refraction. Use the letter R for the label.
[1]
(iii)
The student uses a semicircular glass block. State the name of one other piece of
equipment that he needs for the investigation.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a ray of red light incident on the flat surface of the semicircular glass block.
The angle of incidence is greater than the critical angle for glass.
X
air
glass
ray of
red light
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, draw the path of the ray after it strikes the flat surface.
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-316-
13
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows an electric circuit.
A
component X
V
light-dependent
resistor (LDR)
Fig. 9.1
(i)
The current in the metal wires of the circuit is a flow of particles.
State the name of these particles.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State the name of component X.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
The circuit is in a darkened room. The voltmeter reading is 5.5 V and the ammeter
reading is 0.050 A.
Calculate the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (LDR).
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [3]
(b) The light in the room is switched on. The room becomes bright.
State and explain how increasing the brightness of the light that falls on the LDR changes the
current in the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-317-
[Turn over
14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows an electric screwdriver which has an electric motor and a battery.
electric
motor
battery
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i)
The electric motor has a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field. The screwdriver’s
manufacturer decides that the turning effect of the coil is too small.
State three ways of increasing the turning effect of the coil.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
3. .......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii)
The coil in the motor can rotate in either direction.
State what happens in the coil to reverse the direction of rotation.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The battery is charged using a transformer connected to an a.c. power supply.
The primary voltage Vp to the transformer is 234 V and the secondary voltage Vs of the
transformer is 18 V.
The number of turns on the primary coil Np is 2470 turns.
Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil Ns.
Ns = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-318-
15
11
(a) The nuclide notation
A
Z
X describes the nucleus of an atom.
Draw a line from each symbol to the correct description of the symbol.
symbol
description
half-life value
A
neutron number
nucleon number
Z
type of radiation
proton number
[2]
(b) The activity of a sample of a radioactive nuclide is measured in June of each year.
In June 2004 the activity was 80 000 counts / s.
In June 2014 the activity was 20 000 counts / s.
(i)
Show that the half-life of the nuclide is 5 years.
[3]
(ii)
Determine the year when the activity of the sample was 10 000 counts / s.
year = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/32/M/J/21
-319-
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 9 2 2 0 8 3 4 5 6 *
PHYSICS
0625/62
May/June 2021
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
1 hour
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 40.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 12 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (MS/SW) 199686/3
© UCLES 2021
[Turn over
-320-
2
1
A student determines the density of sand.
Fig. 1.1 shows a beaker with a mark at the 250 cm3 level.
250 cm3
Fig. 1.1
(a) Estimate the volume of water VW that the beaker would hold when filled to the top.
VW = .................................................. cm3 [1]
(b) The student uses string and a metre rule to determine the circumference c of the beaker.
21.3 cm
c = ...............................................................
Explain briefly how to use the string and the metre rule to determine the circumference c as
accurately as possible. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The student measures the height h of the beaker.
(i)
Show clearly on Fig. 1.1, the height h that he should measure.
9.0 cm
h = ...............................................................
His reading is
(ii)
[1]
Calculate the external volume VB of the beaker using the equation
VB =
hc 2
.
12.6
VB = .................................................. cm3 [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/62/M/J/21
-321-
3
(d) The student measures the mass of the beaker on a balance, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
(i)
Write down the mass mB of the beaker, to the nearest gram.
208.3 g
Fig. 1.2
mB = ...................................................... g [1]
The student fills the beaker to the top with dry sand. He measures the mass m of the beaker
containing the sand.
724 g
m = ...............................................................
(ii)
Calculate the mass mS of sand in the beaker. Use the equation mS = (m – mB).
mS = ...................................................... g [1]
(iii)
Calculate the density ρ of the sand using the equation
m
ρ = S.
VB
Include the unit.
ρ = ......................................................... [2]
(e) The student uses a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of dry sand. Draw a diagram
of the measuring cylinder and show the line of sight that the student must use to obtain an
accurate volume reading.
[1]
© UCLES 2021
0625/62/M/J/21
-322-
[Total: 11]
[Turn over
4
2
A student investigates the position of the image in a plane mirror.
Fig. 2.1 shows the ray-trace sheet that the student uses.
R
M
P3
P4
eye
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2021
0625/62/M/J/21
-323-
5
(a)
•
The line MR shows the position of a plane mirror. Draw a normal to this line that passes
through its centre. Continue the normal so that it reaches the bottom of the ray-trace
sheet. Label the normal NL. Label the point at which NL crosses MR with the letter B.
• Draw a line CD 5.0 cm below MR and parallel to MR.
• Label the point X where CD crosses NL.
• Draw a line EF 5.0 cm below CD and parallel to CD.
• Label the point Y where EF crosses NL.
[2]
(b) Draw a line 7.0 cm long from B at an angle of incidence θ1 = 20° to the normal below MR and
to the left of the normal. Label the end of this line A.
[1]
(c) The student places two pins, P1 and P2 , on line AB. Suggest a suitable distance x between
the pins for this type of ray-trace experiment.
x = ......................................................... [1]
(d) The student views the images of pins P1 and P2 from the direction indicated by the eye in
Fig. 2.1. She places pin P3 on line CD so that the images of P2 and P1 appear exactly behind
pin P3.
She places pin P4 on line EF so that pin P3, and the images of P2 and P1, all appear exactly
behind pin P4. The positions of P3 and P4 are shown on Fig. 2.1.
(i)
Measure and record the distance a from X to P3.
a = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
Measure and record the distance b from Y to P4.
b = ......................................................... [1]
(iii)
© UCLES 2021
Calculate
a
.
b
a
= ......................................................... [1]
b
0625/62/M/J/21
-324-
[Turn over
6
(e) The student repeats the procedure using an angle of incidence θ2 = 40°. She records the new
values of a and b.
4.2 cm
a = ...............................................................
8.3 cm
b = ...............................................................
Calculate the new value
(f)
a
.
b
a
= ......................................................... [2]
b
a
State and explain whether the two values of
can be considered to be equal in this
b
experiment.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(g) A student carries out this experiment with care. Suggest a practical reason why the results
may not be accurate.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021
0625/62/M/J/21
-325-
7
3
A student investigates resistance.
Fig. 3.1 shows the circuit used.
power supply
A
l
resistance
wire
R
B
C
D
sliding
contact S
V
Fig. 3.1
(a) The student measures the current I in the circuit.
He places the sliding contact S at C and measures the potential difference (p.d.) V1 across
the resistor R.
The voltmeter and ammeter are shown in Fig. 3.2 and Fig. 3.3.
1
3
2
0.2
5
0
(i)
4
0.6
0.4
0.8
1.0
0
V
A
Fig. 3.2
Fig. 3.3
Write down the readings.
Include the units for potential difference, current or resistance where appropriate in all
parts of the question.
V1 = ...............................................................
I1 = ...............................................................
[2]
(ii)
© UCLES 2021
Calculate the resistance R1 of the resistor using the equation R1 =
V1
.
I1
R1 = ...............................................................
[2]
0625/62/M/J/21
[Turn over
-326-
8
(b) The student disconnects the voltmeter from terminal B and connects the voltmeter to
terminal C.
He places the sliding contact S at a distance l = 20.0 cm from C. He records, in Table 3.1, the
reading on the voltmeter.
He repeats the procedure using l = 40.0 cm, 60.0 cm, 80.0 cm and 100.0 cm. His readings are
shown in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
l / cm
V/V
20.0
0.4
40.0
0.8
60.0
1.1
80.0
1.5
100.0
1.9
Plot a graph of V / V (y-axis) against l / cm (x-axis). Start both axes at the origin (0,0).
0
0
[4]
© UCLES 2021
0625/62/M/J/21
-327-
9
(c) Use your value of V1 from (a)(i) to find the length l R of resistance wire that has the same
resistance as resistor R. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary
information.
l R = ................................................... cm [2]
(d) The resistance of the resistance wire is proportional to its length. Estimate the resistance of
100 cm of the resistance wire.
estimate ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021
0625/62/M/J/21
-328-
[Turn over
10
4
A student investigates springs made from different metals.
Plan an experiment to investigate the extension of springs made from different metals.
The following apparatus is available:
boss, clamp and stand
metre rule
springs made from different metals
selection of loads with hangers.
You can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.
In your plan, you should:
•
write a list of suitable metals for the springs
•
draw a diagram of the set up you would use
•
explain briefly how to carry out the investigation
•
state the key variables to keep constant
•
draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display your readings (you are
not required to enter any readings in the table)
•
explain how you would use the readings to reach a conclusion.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2021
0625/62/M/J/21
-329-
11
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/62/M/J/21
-330-
Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS
0625/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
May/June 2022
45 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.
*7135464643*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
 There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.
 Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 40.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 16 pages.
IB22 06_0625_12/4RP
© UCLES 2022
[Turn over
-331-
2
1
A lump of modelling clay is moved from a small measuring cylinder to a large measuring cylinder
that has twice the diameter.
water
modelling
clay
small cylinder
large cylinder
The reading on the small measuring cylinder goes down by 20 cm3.
By how much does the reading on the large cylinder go up?
A
2
3
10 cm3
B
20 cm3
C
40 cm3
D
80 cm3
What is used to determine the distance travelled by an object in motion?
A
the area under a distance–time graph
B
the area under a speed–time graph
C
the gradient of a distance–time graph
D
the gradient of a speed–time graph
A man stands next to a railway track.
A train travelling at 40 m / s takes 2.0 s to pass the man.
What is the length of the train?
A
20 m
© UCLES 2022
B
38 m
C
40 m
0625/12/M/J/22
-332-
D
80 m
3
4
An object is moved from point X to point Y.
The acceleration of free fall at X is different from that at Y.
Which statement about the object at Y is correct?
5
A
Both its mass and its weight are different from those at X.
B
Both its mass and its weight are the same as those at X.
C
Its mass is the same as at X but its weight is different.
D
Its weight is the same as at X but its mass is different.
A measuring cylinder contains 30 cm3 of a liquid.
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
balance
Some more of the liquid is added until the liquid level reaches the 50 cm3 mark.
The reading on the balance increases by 30 g.
What is the density of the liquid?
A
0.60 g / cm3
© UCLES 2022
B
0.67 g / cm3
C
1.5 g / cm3
0625/12/M/J/22
-333-
D
1.7 g / cm3
[Turn over
4
6
A spaceship approaches and passes a planet.
spaceship
planet
What can the force of gravity between the spaceship and planet achieve?
7
A
It can change the direction of the spaceship, or slow it down, but not speed it up.
B
It can change the direction of the spaceship, or speed it up, but not slow it down.
C
It can slow down the spaceship, or speed it up, but not change its direction.
D
It can change the direction of the spaceship, slow it down, or speed it up.
A beam is pivoted at one end, as shown.
40 cm
X
beam
pivot
6.0 N
The beam weighs 6.0 N and its weight acts at a point X 40 cm from the pivot.
A force of 4.0 N is applied to the beam causing it to balance horizontally.
In which direction and where is the 4.0 N force applied?
8
A
vertically downwards at 20 cm to the left of X
B
vertically downwards at 20 cm to the right of X
C
vertically upwards at 20 cm to the left of X
D
vertically upwards at 20 cm to the right of X
What are the conditions for an object to be in equilibrium?
forces on object
moment on object
A
no resultant force
no resultant moment
B
no resultant force
resultant moment
C
resultant force
no resultant moment
D
resultant force
resultant moment
© UCLES 2022
0625/12/M/J/22
-334-
5
9
A tennis ball is dropped from position 1. It falls vertically onto a hard surface at position 2.
tennis ball
position 1
position 2
Which energy changes have taken place between position 1 and position 2?
A
gravitational potential  kinetic  chemical
B
gravitational potential  kinetic  elastic (strain)
C
kinetic  gravitational potential  chemical
D
kinetic  gravitational potential  elastic (strain)
10 A force does work moving an object in the direction of the force.
Which change in the force and distance always increases the work done?
force
distance
A
greater
same
B
greater
smaller
C
same
smaller
D
smaller
smaller
11 The table shows the weights and base areas of four metal blocks.
Which block exerts the greatest pressure on its base?
weight / N
area of
base / m2
A
3 000
0.20
B
10 000
0.50
C
16 000
2.0
D
20 000
1.5
© UCLES 2022
0625/12/M/J/22
-335-
[Turn over
6
12 The diagram shows a deep reservoir formed by a dam.
water
X
dam
On what does the pressure at X depend?
A
the depth of the water at X
B
the length of the reservoir
C
the surface area of the water
D
the thickness of the dam wall
13 A particular state of matter consists of molecules that move freely in random directions at high
speed. The average speed of the molecules is decreasing.
Which state of matter is being described?
A
a gas cooling
B
a gas being heated
C
a solid cooling
D
a liquid being heated
14 Small pollen particles are suspended in water.
When viewed with a microscope, the pollen particles can be seen to be moving about irregularly.
What causes this movement?
A
The pollen particles are being bombarded by the heavier particles of the water.
B
The pollen particles are being bombarded by the lighter particles of the water.
C
The temperature of the water is higher than that of the pollen particles.
D
The temperature of the water is lower than that of the pollen particles.
© UCLES 2022
0625/12/M/J/22
-336-
7
15 The diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Which physical property of the thermometer is used to measure temperature?
A
expansion of glass
B
expansion of liquid
C
mass of glass
D
mass of liquid
16 An engineer investigates the increase in temperature of the oil in a car engine when it is first
switched on.
Which row is correct?
change in
internal energy
explanation
A
increase
The random kinetic energy of the particles increases.
B
increase
The oil evaporates when it is heated.
C
decrease
The potential energy of the particles increases.
D
decrease
The oil changes state to a gas when it is heated.
17 A glass contains an iced drink on a warm and humid day. Water starts to form on the outside of
the glass.
What is the name of the effect by which the water forms?
A
condensation
B
conduction
C
convection
D
evaporation
© UCLES 2022
0625/12/M/J/22
-337-
[Turn over
8
18 The diagram shows solar water panels on the roof of a house. The panels absorb energy from
the Sun to heat up the water in the metal pipes.
metal pipes
Which row describes how energy is transferred from the Sun and through the metal of the pipes?
from the Sun
through the
metal of the pipes
A
conduction
conduction
B
conduction
convection
C
radiation
conduction
D
radiation
convection
19 Four beakers containing equal volumes of water at 10 C are placed outside in full sunshine on a
hot day.
The four beakers are identical except for their surface colour and texture.
Which beaker will heat up the quickest?
© UCLES 2022
A
B
C
D
dull black
shiny black
dull white
shiny white
0625/12/M/J/22
-338-
9
20 The diagram shows a wave.
2.0
displacement / cm
1.0
0
0
4.0
8.0
12.0
16.0
20.0
24.0
28.0
distance / cm
–1.0
–2.0
Which row is correct?
amplitude of
the wave / cm
wavelength of
the wave / cm
A
1.0
4.0
B
1.0
8.0
C
2.0
4.0
D
2.0
8.0
21 A girl is sitting on a rock in the sea looking at passing waves. She notices that five complete
wavelengths pass her in 20 s.
What is the frequency of this wave?
A
0.25 Hz
B
4.0 Hz
C
15 Hz
D
100 Hz
22 A student uses one eye to look at images in a plane mirror.
plane mirror
P
Q
R
E
S
X
T
U
Y
Objects are placed on the line XY.
Which objects give rise to images that can be seen by the eye at E?
A
P, Q, R, S, T and U
B
Q, R, S and T only
C
P and U only
D
R and S only
© UCLES 2022
0625/12/M/J/22
-339-
[Turn over
10
23 An object is placed in front of a converging lens. The lens has a focal length f.
In which labelled position should the object be placed in order to produce a real image that is
smaller than the object?
A
B
C
lens
D
f
2f
24 Microwaves, green light and infrared are three types of electromagnetic radiation.
What is their order when listed by wavelength from the shortest wavelength to the longest?
A
green light  infrared  microwaves
B
green light  microwaves  infrared
C
infrared  green light  microwaves
D
microwaves  infrared  green light
25 Which statement correctly compares radio waves and X-rays?
A
Radio waves have a longer wavelength and a greater speed in a vacuum.
B
Radio waves have a longer wavelength and the same speed in a vacuum.
C
Radio waves have a shorter wavelength and a greater speed in a vacuum.
D
Radio waves have a shorter wavelength and the same speed in a vacuum.
26 The three diagrams each show two magnets.
1
S
2
N
N
S
S
N
3
N
S
S
N
In which diagrams do the two magnets attract each other?
A
1 only
© UCLES 2022
B
1 and 3
C
2 only
0625/12/M/J/22
-340-
D
2 and 3
S
N
11
27 The diagram shows the magnetic fields around three objects, P, Q and R, placed close to each
other.
P
Q
R
Which row shows the nature of each of the objects?
P
Q
R
A
permanent magnet
N
S
copper rod
permanent magnet
N
S
B
permanent magnet
N
S
copper rod
permanent magnet
S
N
C
permanent magnet
N
S
iron rod
permanent magnet
N
S
D
permanent magnet
N
S
iron rod
permanent magnet
S
N
28 Iron filings are picked up by an electromagnet.
The current in the electromagnet is switched off and the filings fall on a plastic bench.
A plastic comb is rubbed with a woollen cloth and held just above the iron filings.
Some of the filings jump and stick to the comb.
Which statement correctly explains the last observation?
A
The comb has been electrically charged by rubbing with the cloth.
B
The comb has been magnetised by rubbing with the cloth.
C
The filings have been electrically charged by the electromagnet.
D
The filings have been magnetised by the electromagnet.
© UCLES 2022
0625/12/M/J/22
-341-
[Turn over
12
29 Four circuits are set up.
In which circuit does the meter measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor?
A
B
C
D
A
V
A
V
30 A resistor has a potential difference (p.d.) of 12 V across it and a current of 0.60 A in it.
What is the resistance of the resistor?
A
0.050 
© UCLES 2022
B
2.0 
C
7.2 
0625/12/M/J/22
-342-
D
20 
13
31 Which circuit is correctly labelled?
B
A
battery
cell
ammeter
galvanometer
A
relay
light-dependent resistor
A
V
ammeter
voltmeter
C
cell
D
battery
heater
switch
thermistor
ammeter
fixed resistor
A
galvanometer
© UCLES 2022
0625/12/M/J/22
-343-
[Turn over
14
32 The diagram shows an electric circuit.
X
IX
Y
IY
IX is the current in resistor X. IY is the current in resistor Y.
Which statement describes the current from the power supply?
A
greater than IX and greater than IY
B
greater than IX and less than IY
C
less than IX and greater than IY
D
less than IX and less than IY
33 The diagram shows a battery connected to a potential divider and to two lamps, P and Q.
P
X
Y
Q
The slider on the potential divider is moved from end X to end Y of the resistor.
Which row shows the effect on the brightness of each lamp?
brightness of P
brightness of Q
A
brighter
brighter
B
brighter
dimmer
C
unchanged
brighter
D
unchanged
dimmer
© UCLES 2022
0625/12/M/J/22
-344-
15
34 Why is a fuse used in an electrical circuit?
A
so that the current can have only one value
B
to prevent the current becoming too large
C
to provide a path to earth if a fault occurs
D
to save electrical energy
35 Electrical power is transmitted from power stations to homes using the National Grid.
In which part of the National Grid is the voltage highest?
B
A
step-down
transformer
step-up
transformer
C
step-down
transformer
power
station
D
houses
36 Which transformer can change a 240 V a.c. input into a 15 V a.c. output?
A
800 turns
B
40 turns
1000 turns
C
2400 turns
25 turns
D
15 turns
1200 turns
75 turns
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022
0625/12/M/J/22
-345-
[Turn over
16
37 The coils in two electric motors are identical in size, but motor 1 is observed to spin more quickly
than motor 2.
Three suggestions are made to explain this observation.
1
The current in the coil of motor 1 is greater than the current in the coil of motor 2.
2
The number of turns on the coil of motor 1 is greater than on the coil of motor 2.
3
The magnets in motor 1 are stronger than the magnets in motor 2.
Which suggestions give a possible explanation for this observation?
A
1 only
B
1 and 3 only
C
2 and 3 only
D
1, 2 and 3
38 Which statement describes two atoms of different isotopes of an element?
A
two atoms with the same nucleon number but different proton number
B
two atoms with a different nucleon number but the same proton number
C
two atoms with the same nucleon number and the same proton number
D
two atoms with a different nucleon number and different proton number
39 A radioactive source has a half-life of 0.5 hours.
A detector near the source shows a reading of 6000 counts per second.
Background radiation can be ignored.
What is the reading on the detector 1.5 hours later?
A
750 counts per second
B
1500 counts per second
C
2000 counts per second
D
3000 counts per second
40 Some nuclei are unstable. They emit radiation and change into nuclei of a different element.
What is this process called?
A
convection
B
electromagnetic induction
C
radioactive decay
D
the motor effect
© UCLES 2022
0625/12/M/J/22
-346-
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 4 2 6 2 2 6 2 5 4 *
PHYSICS
0625/32
May/June 2022
Paper 3 Theory (Core)
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages.
DC (PQ/SG) 214921/2
© UCLES 2022
[Turn over
-347-
2
1
A student investigates the motion of a trolley as it travels down a slope.
(a) The student makes two measurements to determine the average speed of the trolley as it
travels down the slope.
State the two measurements.
For each measurement, suggest the instrument used for making the measurement.
1. measurement .................................. instrument used .........................................................
2. measurement .................................. instrument used .........................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the speed–time graph for a different trolley as it travels down a slope.
30
speed
cm / s
25
20
15
10
5
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
time / s
10
Fig. 1.1
(i)
Determine the speed of the trolley at time = 2.0 s.
speed = ................................................ cm / s [2]
(ii)
Determine the distance moved by the trolley from time = 0 to time = 4.0 s.
distance = .................................................... cm [3]
(iii)
Using the information in Fig. 1.1, describe the motion of the trolley from time = 0 to
time = 10 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-348-
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a closed textbook.
m
29 m
Fig. 2.1
(a) There are 270 sheets of paper in the textbook. The total thickness of the sheets is 29 mm.
Calculate the average thickness of one sheet of paper.
average thickness of one sheet = ................................................... mm [3]
(b) The mass of the textbook is 1300 g.
Calculate the weight of the textbook.
weight = ...................................................... N [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-349-
[Turn over
4
3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows an aeroplane flying. There are horizontal forces acting on the aeroplane, as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
12 000 N
8000 N
Fig. 3.1 (not to scale)
(i)
Calculate the resultant horizontal force on the aeroplane.
resultant force = ............................................................ N
direction of resultant force ...............................................................
[3]
(ii)
State the name of the effect producing the 8000 N force on the aeroplane.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
At a later time in the flight, the resultant horizontal force on the aeroplane is zero.
Describe the horizontal motion of the aeroplane.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the handle used to open and close a cupboard door on the aeroplane.
60 N
pivot
20 cm
Fig. 3.2 (not to scale)
A force of 60 N acts at a distance of 20 cm from the pivot of the handle.
Calculate the moment of the 60 N force about the pivot.
moment = ................................................. N cm [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-350-
5
4
Fig. 4.1 shows parts of a coal-fired power station.
transformer
X
Y
transmission
lines
coal
steam
boiler
cold water
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i)
State the names of the parts of the power station labelled X and Y.
X ........................................................................................................................................
Y ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
Describe two useful energy transfers in this power station.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The power station contains a transformer. The primary voltage Vp for the transformer is 25 000 V.
The number of turns on the primary coil Np is 600.
The number of turns on the secondary coil Ns is 4800.
Calculate the secondary voltage Vs for the transformer.
Vs = ...................................................... V [3]
(c) Give two reasons for transmitting electrical energy at very high voltages.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-351-
[Total: 9]
[Turn over
6
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a cross-section of a flask. The flask is used to keep a liquid hot. The flask has two
glass walls with a vacuum between them. The surfaces of the glass walls are shiny.
plastic cap
double-walled
glass container
hot liquid
vacuum
shiny surfaces
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i)
Explain how the shiny surfaces reduce the transfer of thermal energy from the hot liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Explain how the vacuum reduces the transfer of thermal energy from the hot liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Some of the hot liquid is poured out of the flask into a shallow dish.
Explain how evaporation causes the liquid to cool.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-352-
7
(c) A student uses a microscope to view a small particle in the liquid. Fig. 5.2 shows the path of
the particle.
small particle
Fig. 5.2
(i)
State the name given to the motion of the small particle.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain why the small particle moves as shown in Fig. 5.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-353-
[Turn over
8
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows the main regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. Two of the regions are
unlabelled.
radio
waves
........................
........................
visible light
ultraviolet
rays
X-rays
γ (gamma)rays
Fig. 6.1
(i)
Complete the labelling in Fig. 6.1. Write the name of the radiation in each unlabelled
region.
[2]
(ii)
State the name of one region of the electromagnetic spectrum that has wavelengths
shorter than those of ultraviolet rays.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 6.2 represents a wave on a rope at one instant.
direction of
wave travel
displacement
0
distance moved by wave
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw a line representing one wavelength. Label the line L.
[1]
(c) A student incorrectly writes some sentences about electromagnetic waves. His teacher circles
a mistake in each sentence.
In Table 6.1, write a suitable correction for each mistake. The first one has been done for you.
Table 6.1
student’s sentences
The speed of light is slower than the speed of radio waves in a vacuum.
correction
the same as
Ultraviolet rays are used in signals for satellite television and mobile phones.
Radio waves are used to scan patients for broken bones.
[2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-354-
9
(d) Describe the difference between the vibrations of longitudinal waves and transverse waves.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-355-
[Turn over
10
7
(a) A student investigates refraction through a parallel-sided glass block. Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of
red light travelling from the air through the glass block.
ray of red light
line X
48°
air
61°
glass
block
29°
air
Fig. 7.1
(i)
Using the information in Fig. 7.1, state the angle of refraction for the ray of red light
travelling from air into the glass block.
angle of refraction = ....................................................... ° [1]
(ii)
Using the information in Fig. 7.1, state the term used for line X.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-356-
11
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows an object OX to the left of a thin converging lens. The principal focus on each
side of the lens is labelled F.
X
O
F
F
Fig. 7.2
(i)
Two rays from the top of the object are incident on the lens, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
On Fig. 7.2, continue the paths of these two rays to show the position of the image of OX
formed by the lens.
[2]
(ii)
Draw the image of OX formed by the lens.
[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-357-
[Turn over
12
8
(a) A student has a box containing objects made of different materials. The objects are:
aluminium foil
a silver ring
a plastic strip
(i)
an iron bar
a glass lens
State which objects are made of electrically insulating materials.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State which object is made of a magnetic material.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows two magnets, X and Y. The magnets are attracting each other.
N
magnet X
attraction
magnet Y
Fig. 8.1
On magnet X, the N pole is labelled N.
On Fig. 8.1, complete the labelling for the magnetic poles of each magnet.
[1]
(c) The student attaches a thin cotton thread to each of two light metal spheres, P and Q. She
suspends the spheres as shown in Fig. 8.2.
thin cotton
thread
P
support
Q
Fig. 8.2
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-358-
13
(i)
The student puts a positive charge on sphere P only.
Complete the diagram in Fig. 8.3 to show the positions of the spheres.
support
Fig. 8.3
(ii)
[1]
The student puts a positive charge on sphere P and on sphere Q.
Complete the diagram in Fig. 8.4 to show the positions of the spheres.
support
Fig. 8.4
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-359-
[Turn over
14
9
A student has a battery-operated torch. Fig. 9.1 shows the electrical components in the torch
circuit.
battery
plastic
case
brass
connecting
strip
+
switch
lamp
Fig. 9.1
(a) Using standard symbols, draw a circuit diagram for the circuit in the torch.
[4]
(b) When the torch is switched on, the potential difference (p.d.) across the lamp is 1.4 V and the
current in the lamp is 0.26 A.
(i)
State the current in the brass connecting strip.
current = ....................................................... A [1]
(ii)
Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-360-
15
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a wire passing through a card. There is a large electric current in the wire in
the direction shown.
Fig. 10.2 shows the same arrangement when viewed from above the card.
card
large
current
card
Fig. 10.1
Fig. 10.2
There is a pattern of magnetic field lines around the wire due to the current in the wire.
On Fig. 10.2, draw the pattern and direction of the magnetic field as if viewed from above the
card.
[3]
(b) Fig. 10.3 shows a wire XY carrying a large electric current between the poles of a permanent
magnet. There is an upward force on the wire XY.
X
current
force
magnet
magnet
N
S
Y
Fig. 10.3
(i)
State two different ways of increasing the force due to the current in the wire XY.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
State two different ways of making the force on the wire XY act downwards.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-361-
[Turn over
16
11
(a) An isotope of americium has 95 protons and 146 neutrons in its nucleus.
Write the nuclide notation for the nucleus of this isotope. The chemical symbol for americium
is Am.
[2]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows how the count rate of a sample of americium changes with time.
18 000
count rate
counts / min
16 000
14 000
12 000
10 000
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
0
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300
time / years
Fig. 11.1
Determine the half-life of the americium in the sample. Use information from Fig. 11.1.
half-life = ............................................... years [2]
[Total: 4]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022
0625/32/M/J/22
-362-
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 6 9 0 2 4 8 1 9 9 *
PHYSICS
0625/62
May/June 2022
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
1 hour
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 40.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 12 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (JP/SG) 303529/2
© UCLES 2022
[Turn over
-363-
2
1
A student investigates the balancing of a metre rule.
Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus.
50.0 cm mark
P
0
a
metre rule
Q
b
100
10.0 cm mark
bench
pivot
Fig. 1.1
(a) The student places the metre rule on the pivot at the 50.0 cm mark.
She places object P with its centre on the metre rule at the 10.0 cm mark.
The object covers the scale markings on the metre rule, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
0
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Fig. 1.2
Explain briefly how to place object P as accurately as possible with its centre at the
10.0 cm mark.
You may add to Fig. 1.2, or draw another diagram, to help your explanation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2022
0625/62/M/J/22
-364-
3
(b) The student places object Q on the metre rule and adjusts its position until the metre rule is
as close to balancing as possible.
She records the distance a = 40.0 cm between the centre of object P and the pivot.
The centre of object Q is at the 71.2 cm mark.
Determine, and record in Table 1.1, the distance b between the centre of object Q and the
pivot. Show your working.
[2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/62/M/J/22
-365-
[Turn over
4
(c) She repeats the procedure with object P placed at the 15.0 cm mark, 20.0 cm mark,
25.0 cm mark and 30.0 cm mark. All the values of a and b are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
a / cm
40.0
35.0
30.0
25.0
20.0
b / cm
17.8
15.1
12.3
9.7
Plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against b / cm (x-axis). You do not need to start your graph from
the origin (0,0).
[4]
(d) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
necessary information.
G = ......................................................... [2]
(e) The gradient G of the graph is equal to the ratio of the masses of P and Q.
Record the ratio R of the masses of P and Q. Give your answer to a suitable number of
significant figures for this experiment.
R = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2022
0625/62/M/J/22
-366-
5
2
A student investigates the resistances of combinations of resistors.
The first circuit arrangement is shown in Fig. 2.1.
A
RA
RB
V
Fig. 2.1
(a) The student measures the current and decides to use a lower current. He adds a variable
resistor to the circuit to reduce the current.
On Fig. 2.1, mark with an X a suitable position in the circuit for the variable resistor.
0.2
0.6
0.4
0.8
1.0
0
0
1
2
A
5
6 7
8
9
10
V
Fig. 2.2
(b) (i)
3 4
[1]
Fig. 2.3
The student measures the current I1 in the circuit. Record the current shown in Fig. 2.2.
I1 = .......................................................A [1]
(ii)
He measures the potential difference (p.d.) V1 across resistors RA and RB in series.
Record the potential difference V1 shown in Fig. 2.3.
V1 = .......................................................V [1]
© UCLES 2022
0625/62/M/J/22
-367-
[Turn over
6
(c) Calculate the resistance R1 of the combination of resistors in series. Use the equation
V1
R1 = I .
1
Include the unit.
R1 = ......................................................... [1]
(d) The student connects a resistor RC in parallel with resistors RA and RB.
He does not change the series combination of resistors RA and RB.
He connects the voltmeter across the combination of all three resistors.
(i)
Draw a circuit diagram showing the circuit described in (d).
[2]
(ii)
The student measures the current I2 in the circuit.
0.68
A
I2 = ............................................................
He measures the potential difference V2 across the combination of the three resistors.
2.1
V
V2 = ............................................................
Calculate the resistance R2 of the combination of resistors. Use the equation
V2
R2 = I .
2
Include the unit.
R2 = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022
0625/62/M/J/22
-368-
7
(e) The student rearranges the resistors to set up the circuit shown in Fig. 2.4.
A
RA
RB
RC
V
Fig. 2.4
He measures the current I3 in the circuit.
0.29
A
I3 = ............................................................
He measures the potential difference V3 across the combination of the three resistors.
2.1
V
V3 = ...........................................................
Calculate the resistance R3 of the combination of resistors. Use the equation
V3
R3 = I .
3
Include the unit. Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this
experiment.
R3 = ......................................................... [1]
(f)
A student thinks the three resistors RA, RB and RC have the same resistance within the limits
of experimental accuracy.
(i)
Suggest how the student could use the apparatus provided to test his idea.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Explain how the student can decide whether the values of resistance are the same within
the limits of experimental accuracy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022
0625/62/M/J/22
-369-
[Total: 11]
[Turn over
8
3
A student determines the focal length f of a lens.
Fig. 3.1 shows the set-up.
illuminated
object
x
y
z
screen
lens
bench
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i)
On Fig. 3.1, measure the distance x from the screen to the illuminated object.
x = ...............................................................
Fig. 3.1 is drawn to scale. The actual distance D between the illuminated object and the
screen is 75.0 cm.
She places the lens between the object and the screen so that the lens is close to the
illuminated object.
She moves the lens away from the object until a clearly focused image is formed on the
screen.
On Fig. 3.1, measure the distance y between the centre of the lens and the illuminated
object.
y = ...............................................................
On Fig. 3.1, measure the distance z between the centre of the lens and the screen.
z = ...............................................................
[2]
Table 3.1
D / cm
u / cm
v / cm
f / cm
19.1
64.1
14.4
75.0
85.0
© UCLES 2022
0625/62/M/J/22
-370-
9
(ii)
Calculate, and record in Table 3.1, the actual distance u between the centre of the lens
and the illuminated object.
Calculate, and record in Table 3.1, the actual distance v between the centre of the lens
and the screen.
[1]
(iii)
Calculate, and record in Table 3.1, the focal length f of the lens using the equation
uv
f= D.
[1]
(b) The student places the screen at a distance D = 85.0 cm from the illuminated object.
She repeats the procedure described in (a). The results are shown in Table 3.1.
Calculate the average value fA of the focal length of the lens. Show your working.
fA = ................................................... cm [2]
(c) State two precautions that you would take to obtain accurate readings in this experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) A student states that a more accurate value for the focal length f of the lens can be determined
by plotting a graph of uv against D. The gradient of the graph is numerically equal to the focal
length.
(i)
Suggest a suitable number of sets of readings that the student should take.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain briefly how this graphical method can give a more accurate value for the focal
length.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2022
0625/62/M/J/22
-371-
[Turn over
10
4
A student investigates insulators.
Plan an experiment to list insulating discs in order from best insulator to worst insulator.
The following apparatus is available:
•
•
•
•
•
five discs made from different insulating materials
a thermometer
a stop-watch
a heated metal cylinder (see Fig. 4.1)
a second metal cylinder with a hole for the thermometer (see Fig. 4.1).
heated metal cylinder
insulating disc
electrical heater
thermometer
metal cylinder
Fig. 4.1
You can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.
In your plan, you should:
•
explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation
•
state the key variables that you would control
•
draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your
readings (you are not required to enter any readings in the table)
•
explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.
© UCLES 2022
0625/62/M/J/22
-372-
11
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/62/M/J/22
-373-
Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS
0625/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
May/June 2023
45 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.
*8707796133*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
 There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.
 Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 40.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
IB23 06_0625_12/4RP
© UCLES 2023
[Turn over
-374-
2
1
2
Which single apparatus is used to find the volume of a solid cube and which single apparatus is
used to find the volume of a quantity of liquid?
volume of solid cube
volume of liquid
A
balance
balance
B
balance
measuring cylinder
C
ruler
balance
D
ruler
measuring cylinder
The speed–time graph represents a short journey.
speed
0
time
0
Which distance–time graph represents the same journey?
A
B
distance
distance
0
0
time
0
C
D
distance
distance
0
0
0
© UCLES 2023
time
0
time
0
0625/12/M/J/23
-375-
time
3
3
The graph represents the motion of a car.
10
speed
m/s
8
6
4
2
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
time / s
How far has the car moved between 0 and 5 s?
A
4
5
2m
B
10 m
C
25 m
D
50 m
Which statement about mass or weight is not correct?
A
Masses can be compared using a balance.
B
Mass is a force.
C
Weights can be compared using a balance.
D
Weight is a force.
Which two quantities must be known to determine the density of a material?
A
mass and area
B
mass and volume
C
weight and area
D
weight and volume
© UCLES 2023
0625/12/M/J/23
-376-
[Turn over
4
6
Two boys are sitting on a see-saw. The see-saw is in equilibrium and remains horizontal.
pivot
What affects the moment of each boy about the pivot?
7
A
his distance from the pivot only
B
his height above the ground and his weight
C
his weight only
D
his weight and distance from the pivot
A uniform metre rule is pivoted in equilibrium at the 50 cm mark. A mass of 25 g is placed at the
30 cm mark on the rule.
What is the smallest mass that can be placed on the rule to restore equilibrium?
A
8
5g
B
10 g
C
15 g
D
25 g
A uniform beam XY is 100 cm long and weighs 4.0 N.
80 cm
60 cm
10 cm
X
Y
centre
of beam
8.0 N
pivot
F
The beam rests on a pivot 60 cm from end X.
A load of 8.0 N hangs from the beam 10 cm from end X.
The beam is kept balanced by a force F acting on the beam 80 cm from end X.
What is the magnitude of force F ?
A
8.0 N
© UCLES 2023
B
18 N
C
22 N
0625/12/M/J/23
-377-
D
44 N
5
9
Three children’s toys, X, Y and Z, are the same size and shape. They have weights at different
positions inside so that the position of the centre of gravity of each toy is different. Each toy’s
centre of gravity is marked P.
X
Y
Z
P
P
P
Which toy is the most stable and which toy is the least stable when balanced in the positions
shown?
most
stable
least
stable
A
X
Y
B
X
Z
C
Y
X
D
Y
Z
10 The diagram shows the energy stores for a mobile (cell) phone and how the energy is transferred
between stores.
chemical
energy
internal
energy
heating
kinetic
energy
sound
?
What describes how the chemical energy is transferred?
A
electrical work done
B
mechanical work done
C
electromagnetic waves
D
sound waves
11 A moving object is brought to rest by a resistive force of 50 N over a distance of 5.0 m.
What is the work done by the force?
A
0.10 J
© UCLES 2023
B
10 J
C
55 J
0625/12/M/J/23
-378-
D
250 J
[Turn over
6
12 Which two physical quantities must be used to calculate the power developed by a student
running up a flight of steps?
A
force exerted and the vertical height of the steps only
B
force exerted and the time taken only
C
work done and the vertical height of the steps only
D
work done and the time taken only
13 A rectangular marble block has dimensions 1 m by 1 m by 5 m and weighs 125 000 N.
The marble block is stored with the long side resting on the ground, as in diagram 1.
diagram 1
diagram 2
What is the change in the pressure on the ground due to the block when the block is stored as in
diagram 2 rather than diagram 1?
A
a decrease of 25 000 N / m2
B
an increase of 100 000 N / m2
C
an increase of 125 000 N / m2
D
no change
14 Four students describe the phrase ‘absolute zero’ during a lesson on the particle model.
Which student is correct?
A
This is the lowest possible temperature.
B
Particles in a solid start vibrating.
C
Particles do not have any weight.
D
Particles have the least gravitational potential energy.
© UCLES 2023
0625/12/M/J/23
-379-
7
15 At the surface of a liquid, the more energetic molecules can escape from the liquid into the
atmosphere.
Which name is given to this process?
A
boiling
B
condensation
C
evaporation
D
melting
16 A teacher puts some cold water in a test-tube.
She holds the bottom of the test-tube while heating the top.
boiling water
cold water
heat
The water at the top boils but she continues to hold the test-tube as the bottom remains cold.
Which conclusion about water is made from this experiment?
A
Water is a bad conductor.
B
Water is a bad convector.
C
Water is a good conductor.
D
Water is a good convector.
© UCLES 2023
0625/12/M/J/23
-380-
[Turn over
8
17 The diagram shows a wave.
8 cm
3 cm
6 cm
4 cm
What are the amplitude and the wavelength of this wave?
amplitude / cm
wavelength / cm
A
3
4
B
3
8
C
6
4
D
6
8
18 A light ray strikes a plane mirror and is reflected.
Which angle is always equal in size to the angle of reflection?
A
the angle between the incident ray and the mirror
B
the angle between the incident ray and the normal to the mirror
C
the angle between the reflected ray and the mirror
D
the angle between the reflected ray and the incident ray
19 The diagram shows two diverging rays of light passing through a lens and emerging parallel to
each other.
Which labelled distance is the focal length of the lens?
thin lens
A
B
© UCLES 2023
0625/12/M/J/23
-381-
D
C
9
20 A beam of light consists of yellow and blue light.
The beam of light is incident on a glass prism.
Which diagram is correct?
A
B
yellow
blue
blue
yellow
glass prism
glass prism
C
D
glass prism
glass prism
blue
yellow
yellow
blue
21 The two devices shown use different types of electromagnetic waves.
medical scanning
remote controller
Which types of waves are used in these devices?
medical
scanning
remote
controller
A
ultraviolet
infrared
B
ultraviolet
microwaves
C
X-rays
infrared
D
X-rays
microwaves
© UCLES 2023
0625/12/M/J/23
-382-
[Turn over
10
22 A boy shouts and hears the echo from a tall building 2.2 s later.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
How far away from the boy is the building?
A
150 m
B
300 m
C
360 m
D
730 m
23 The magnetic field of a bar magnet can be represented by magnetic field lines.
Which diagram shows two magnetic field lines correctly?
A
N
B
S
N
C
S
N
D
S
N
S
24 A plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth. The rod becomes positively charged.
Why has the rod become positively charged?
A
It has gained electrons.
B
It has gained neutrons.
C
It has lost electrons.
D
It has lost neutrons.
25 Which statement about electric current in a conductor is correct?
A
In a d.c. circuit, the electric current gradually decreases along the conductor.
B
In a d.c. circuit, the free electrons flow back and forth.
C
In an a.c. circuit, the electric current remains exactly the same all the time.
D
In an a.c. circuit, the flow of charge changes direction continually.
26 Which circuit can be used to measure the resistance of a resistor?
A
B
C
D
V
V
V
V
A
A
A
A
© UCLES 2023
0625/12/M/J/23
-383-
11
27 A lamp rated 12 V, 2.0 A is switched on for 60 s.
How much energy is transferred?
A
0.40 J
B
10 J
C
360 J
D
1400 J
28 The circuit diagram shows a battery connected to two resistors. Four labelled ammeters are
connected into the circuit.
Which ammeter shows the largest reading?
A D
A
2.0 :
A
B A
1.0 :
A
C
29 Two lamps are connected in parallel.
S1
S2
S3
Which switches must be closed so that both lamps light?
A
S1 and S2 only
B
S1 and S3 only
C
S2 and S3 only
D
S1, S2 and S3
© UCLES 2023
0625/12/M/J/23
-384-
[Turn over
12
30 Which statement about electrical safety is correct?
A
If a device is double insulated, it does not need a fuse.
B
A device that has a normal operating current of 3.0 A must be protected by a 3.0 A fuse.
C
Switches must always be connected into the live supply wire.
D
The metal casing of an electrical device must be connected to the neutral wire.
31 A student investigates the output voltage induced across a coil of wire by a bar magnet.
When will the induced voltage have the greatest value?
A
The student slowly moves the bar magnet into the coil of wire.
B
The student leaves the bar magnet stationary in the coil of wire.
C
The student quickly removes the bar magnet from the coil of wire.
D
The student places the bar magnet at rest outside the coil of wire.
32 In which device is the magnetic effect of a current not used?
A
electromagnet
B
loudspeaker
C
potential divider
D
relay
© UCLES 2023
0625/12/M/J/23
-385-
13
33 The diagram represents the transmission of electricity from a power station to homes that are
many kilometres away. Two transformers are labelled X and Y.
transmission
cables
pylon
pylon
cables
power
station
houses
large
distance
X
ground
Y
What type of transformers are X and Y?
X
Y
A
step-down transformer
step-down transformer
B
step-down transformer
step-up transformer
C
step-up transformer
step-down transformer
D
step-up transformer
step-up transformer
34 Which diagram represents the positions of the charged particles of an atom?
A
B
–
C
+
+
+
–
+
D
–
–
–
+
+
–
–
+
–
+
35 The table shows the composition of three different nuclei.
nucleus
number of
protons
number of
neutrons
X
3
3
Y
3
4
Z
4
3
Which nuclei are isotopes of the same element?
A
X, Y and Z
© UCLES 2023
B
X and Y only
C
X and Z only
0625/12/M/J/23
-386-
D
Y and Z only
[Turn over
14
36 A sample of a radioactive isotope emits 9600 -particles per second.
After 40 hours the rate of emission has fallen to 600 -particles per second.
What is the half-life of this isotope?
A
4.0 hours
B
8.0 hours
C
10 hours
D
20 hours
37 Which row states a harmful effect and a beneficial effect of ionising radiation on living things?
harmful effect
beneficial effect
A
kills cancer cells
kills cancer cells
B
kills cancer cells
mutates living cells
C
mutates living cells
kills cancer cells
D
mutates living cells
mutates living cells
38 Which statement about the Solar System is correct?
A
All the planets are rocky.
B
Only the Earth has a moon.
C
Pluto is a dwarf planet.
D
There are many stars in the Solar System.
39 The graph shows the energy radiated by the Sun at different wavelengths. Most of the energy is
radiated in just three parts of the electromagnetic spectrum, labelled P, Q and R.
energy
radiated
0
0
P
Q
R
Which parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are P and R?
P
R
A
gamma ray
radio
B
infrared
ultraviolet
C
radio
gamma ray
D
ultraviolet
infrared
© UCLES 2023
0625/12/M/J/23
-387-
wavelength
15
40 An astronomer observes redshift in the light from a distant galaxy.
Which statement about redshift is correct?
A
It is the decrease in the observed wavelength of red light emitted from receding galaxies.
B
It is evidence that the Universe is contracting and supports the Big Bang Theory.
C
It is evidence that the Universe is expanding and supports the Big Bang Theory.
D
Redshift is when light from receding galaxies appears blue.
© UCLES 2023
0625/12/M/J/23
-388-
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 4 8 7 8 0 6 9 3 3 *
PHYSICS
0625/32
May/June 2023
Paper 3 Theory (Core)
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (LK/CT) 315185/2
© UCLES 2023
[Turn over
-389-
2
1
A student measures the diameter of some identical steel balls. Fig. 1.1 shows the arrangement
she uses.
A
B
steel balls
0
cm
wooden
block
diameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)
(a) (i)
Using the ruler in Fig. 1.1, determine the distance AB on Fig. 1.1.
distance AB = ................................................... cm [2]
(ii)
Use the distance AB to determine the diameter of one steel ball.
diameter of one steel ball = ................................................... cm [2]
(b) The mass of some steel balls is 54 g and the total volume of these steel balls is 6.9 cm3.
Calculate the density of the steel.
density of steel = .............................................. g / cm3 [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-390-
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows the speed–time graph for a cyclist.
14
W
12
speed 10
m/s
S
8
X
T
6
4
2
0
Y
0
10
20
30
Z
40
time / s
50
Fig. 2.1
(a) In Fig. 2.1, the sections ST, TW, WX, XY and YZ indicate stages of the cyclist’s journey.
State one section which shows the cyclist moving with:
(i)
constant speed
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
constant deceleration
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
constant non-zero acceleration.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled by the cyclist in section ST.
distance travelled = ..................................................... m [3]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-391-
[Turn over
4
(c) Fig. 2.2 shows the horizontal forces on a cyclist.
160 N
220 N
Fig. 2.2
(i)
Calculate the size of the resultant force on the cyclist.
resultant force = ..................................................... N [1]
(ii)
State the effect, if any, of the resultant force on the motion of the cyclist.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-392-
5
3
A student has a battery-powered torch. Fig. 3.1 shows the torch.
base of torch
Fig. 3.1
(a) Fig. 3.2 shows the energy transfers when the torch is switched on. The diagram is incomplete.
...................... energy store
electrical working
100 J
......................... energy
70 J
thermal energy store
.................. J
Fig. 3.2
Show the energy transfers in the torch by completing the labels on Fig. 3.2.
[3]
(b) The weight of the torch is 8.5 N. The student lifts the torch a vertical distance of 0.80 m to
place it on a shelf.
Calculate the work done on the torch by the student.
work done = ...................................................... J [3]
(c) The student places the torch on its base on a shelf. The area of the base of the torch is
44 cm2. The weight of the torch is 8.5 N.
Calculate the pressure on the shelf due to the torch.
pressure on shelf = ............................................. N / cm2 [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-393-
[Turn over
6
4
A student has a block of solid metal at room temperature.
(a) (i)
Describe the arrangement, separation and motion of the particles in the solid metal.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
The student cools the block of metal in a freezer.
State the effect, if any, of cooling on the kinetic energy of the particles in the block of
metal.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i)
State the name of the temperature at which particles have the least kinetic energy.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State the value of temperature at which particles have the least kinetic energy. Include
the unit.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The metal block emits thermal radiation from its surface.
State two features of a surface that is a good emitter of thermal radiation.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-394-
7
5
An observer stands at P and looks into a rock quarry. A small explosion takes place at X in the
quarry.
Fig. 5.1 shows the situation.
Z
P
solid
rock
DANGER –
BLASTING
X small
explosion
Y
rock quarry
Fig. 5.1 (not to scale)
(a) The observer first hears the sound from the explosion 1.8 s after the explosion occurs.
The speed of the sound is 340 m / s.
(i)
Calculate the distance XP from the explosion at X to the observer at P.
distance XP = ..................................................... m [3]
(ii)
The observer then hears a quieter sound from the explosion.
Suggest how the quieter sound waves reach the observer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Before the explosion, a warning siren produces a sound. The wavelength of the sound is
0.28 m.
The speed of the sound is 340 m / s.
Calculate the frequency of the sound.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-395-
[Turn over
8
6
Fig. 6.1 shows light waves passing from air into a glass block.
wavefronts
air
glass
Fig. 6.1 (not to scale)
(a) (i)
State the name of the process shown in Fig. 6.1 as the wavefronts enter the glass block.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State two changes in the light waves as they pass from air into glass.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a ray of red light travelling through a glass fibre. The glass fibre is made of
solid glass.
glass
ray of red light
air
air
Fig. 6.2
State and explain how the ray of red light travels through the glass fibre as shown in Fig. 6.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-396-
9
7
A student uses a permanent magnet to lift some unmagnetised nails. Some of the nails are made
of iron and some are made of steel. Fig. 7.1 shows the magnet lifting the nails.
magnet
N
S
iron
nails
steel
nails
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i)
Each nail lifts the nail below it by induced magnetism.
Describe what is meant by induced magnetism.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
The student leaves the nails attached to the magnet for several hours, then removes the
magnet.
State a difference between a magnetic property of the iron nails and of the steel nails.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A metal wire XY is connected to a voltmeter. The wire is placed between the poles of a
permanent magnet. Fig. 7.2 shows the arrangement.
X
S
N
V
voltmeter
movement
Y
Fig. 7.2
(i)
State the reading on the voltmeter when the wire is stationary between the poles.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Give a reason for the reading on the voltmeter when the wire is moving in the direction
shown in Fig. 7.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-397-
[Turn over
10
8
A student uses the circuit in Fig. 8.1 to measure the resistance of the heater in the circuit.
variable
resistor
heater
Fig. 8.1
(a) The symbols for the meters in Fig. 8.1 are incomplete.
Complete the symbols for the two meters by writing in the circles in Fig. 8.1.
[2]
(b) The current in the heater is 1.4 A and the potential difference (p.d.) across the heater is 8.0 V.
Calculate the resistance of the heater.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [3]
(c) The heater is switched on for 30 s. The current in the heater is 1.4 A and the p.d. across it is
8.0 V.
Calculate the electrical energy transferred by the heater during the 30 s.
energy transferred = ...................................................... J [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-398-
11
9
A student has a desktop computer that connects to the 240 V a.c. mains electrical supply. Fig. 9.1
shows the desktop computer.
desktop
computer
Fig. 9.1
(a) The desktop computer has an on-off switch in one of the wires that connect it to the mains
supply.
State and explain which wire includes the switch.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The desktop computer uses a transformer to change the 240 V a.c. voltage to a 12 V a.c.
voltage.
(i)
State the name of this type of transformer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Describe the construction of this transformer. You may include a labelled diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-399-
[Turn over
12
10 Iodine-131 is a radioactive isotope of the element iodine. Fig. 10.1 shows the nuclide notation for
a nucleus of iodine-131.
131
53
I
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i)
Determine the number of protons in one nucleus of iodine-131.
number of protons = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
Determine the number of neutrons in one nucleus of iodine-131.
number of neutrons = ......................................................... [1]
(b) When a nucleus of iodine-131 decays, it emits a beta (β)-particle and a gamma (γ) ray.
State the nature of a beta-particle and a gamma ray.
A beta-particle is .......................................................................................................................
A gamma ray is .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) A sample contains 1.6 mg of iodine-131.
The half-life of iodine-131 is 8.0 days.
Calculate the mass of iodine-131 remaining in the sample after 24.0 days.
mass of iodine-131 remaining = ................................................... mg [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-400-
13
11
Fig. 11.1 shows the Sun and the four innermost planets, A, B, C, and D, of the Solar System.
planet A
planet C
planet B
planet D
Sun
Fig. 11.1 (not to scale)
(a) In Table 11.1, write the names of the innermost planets. One is done for you.
Table 11.1
planet
name of planet
A
B
Venus
C
D
[2]
(b) Describe how the four innermost planets of the Solar System were formed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/32/M/J/23
-401-
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 9 4 7 1 3 1 7 0 1 7 *
PHYSICS
0625/62
May/June 2023
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
1 hour
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 40.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 12 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (KN/FC) 316349/3
© UCLES 2023
[Turn over
-402-
2
1
A student investigates the stretching of a spring.
Fig. 1.1 shows the set-up.
spring
metre ruler
clamp stand
bench
Fig. 1.1
(a) The value l 0 is the length of the spring when the load L is 0.0 N.
The student measures the length l 0 of the spring. She records l 0 = 16 mm in Table 1.1.
Draw a diagram of the spring to show clearly the length l 0 of the spring.
[1]
(b) The student suspends a load L = 0.20 N from the spring. She records the new length l of the
spring in Table 1.1.
She repeats the procedure using loads L = 0.40 N, 0.60 N, 0.80 N and 1.00 N. The readings
are shown in Table 1.1.
(i)
Calculate the extension e of the spring for each load using the equation e = (l – l 0).
Record the values of e in Table 1.1.
© UCLES 2023
0625/62/M/J/23
-403-
[2]
3
(ii)
Complete the column headings in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
L/
l/
e/
0.00
16
0
0.20
18
0.40
21
0.60
23
0.80
24
1.00
26
[1]
(c) Plot a graph of L (y-axis) against e (x-axis).
Draw the best-fit line.
[4]
(d) Use the graph to determine eA, the extension produced by a load of 0.50 N. Show clearly on
the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
eA = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2023
0625/62/M/J/23
-404-
[Turn over
4
2
A student investigates the cooling of water.
Fig. 2.1 shows the set-up.
thermometer
bench
lid
beaker
Fig. 2.1
(a) The thermometer in Fig. 2.2 shows the room temperature θR at the beginning of the
experiment. Record θR.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
°C
Fig. 2.2
θR = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2023
0625/62/M/J/23
-405-
5
(b) The student pours 200 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. He places a lid on the beaker. He
places the thermometer in the hot water in the beaker.
He records, in Table 2.1, the temperature θ of the hot water at time t = 0. He immediately
starts a stop-watch.
He continues recording the temperature in Table 2.1 at 30 s intervals until he has seven sets
of readings.
(i)
Complete the column headings in Table 2.1.
(ii)
Write the times in the first column of Table 2.1.
[1]
Table 2.1
t/
θ/
92
87
83
80
78
76
75
[1]
(c) (i)
Calculate the decrease in temperature Δθ between t = 0 and t = 180 s.
Δθ = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
Δθ
,
Calculate the average rate of cooling R of the water using the equation R =
Δt
where Δt = 180 s. Include the unit.
R = ......................................................... [2]
(d) A student states that the water cools slowly.
Suggest two changes to the experiment that the student makes to increase the rate of
cooling of the hot water without changing the starting temperature of the hot water. Room
temperature remains constant.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/62/M/J/23
-406-
[Turn over
6
(e) State one precaution that you would take to obtain accurate temperature readings.
Explain briefly the reason for this precaution.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f)
The student uses a measuring cylinder to measure 200 cm3 of water. He takes the reading
from the bottom of the meniscus.
Explain the reason for taking the reading at the bottom of the meniscus rather than at the top
of the meniscus.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2023
0625/62/M/J/23
-407-
7
3
A student investigates the refraction of light using a semicircular transparent block.
Fig. 3.1 shows her ray-trace sheet.
eye
P4
P3
P
A
B
Q
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i)
•
•
•
•
Draw a normal NL through the centre of AB.
Continue the normal so that it passes through the curved side of the block.
Label the normal NL.
Label the point C where the normal NL crosses AB.
[1]
(ii)
•
Draw a line DC, below line PC, at an angle i = 20° to the normal and to the left of the
normal.
[1]
(iii)
•
Mark with neat crosses (X) the positions for two pins on line DC at a suitable
distance apart for this type of ray-trace experiment.
Label the positions P1 and P2.
[1]
•
© UCLES 2023
0625/62/M/J/23
-408-
[Turn over
8
(b) The student looks from the position of the eye shown in Fig. 3.1, to observe the images of P1
and P2 through side AB of the block.
She adjusts her line of sight until the images of P1 and P2 appear one behind the other.
She places two pins, P3 and P4, between her eye and the block so that P3, P4, and the
images of P1 and P2 seen through the block, appear one behind the other.
The positions of P3 and P4 are shown in Fig. 3.1.
(i)
(ii)
•
•
Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line to AB.
Label E, the end of the line furthest from AB.
[1]
Measure the acute angle θ between the line NL and the line EC. (An acute angle is less
than 90°.)
θ = ......................................................... [2]
(c) State one precaution that the student takes to produce an accurate ray trace.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The student replaces the transparent block on the ray-trace sheet in the position shown in
Fig. 3.2.
P
A
C
B
Q
P5
P6
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2023
0625/62/M/J/23
-409-
9
She replaces pins P1 and P2 on line DC in the same positions used in (a)(iii).
She observes the images of P1 and P2 through the curved side of the block. She adjusts her
line of sight until the images of P1 and P2 appear one behind the other.
She places two pins, P5 and P6, between her eye and the block so that P5, P6, and the
images of P1 and P2 seen through the block, appear one behind the other.
The positions of P5 and P6 are shown on Fig. 3.2.
(i)
•
•
Draw a line joining the positions of P5 and P6. Continue the line to C.
Label G, the end of the line furthest from AB.
Measure the acute angle α between the line AB and the line GC. (An acute angle is less
than 90°.)
α = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
Calculate the angle β between the line GC and the normal NL.
β = ......................................................... [1]
(e) A student suggests that angle β should be equal to the angle of incidence i = 20°.
State whether your result supports the suggestion and justify your answer.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2023
0625/62/M/J/23
-410-
[Turn over
10
4
A student investigates the change in current in a conducting liquid as the distance between two
electrodes is changed. The circuit is shown in Fig. 4.1.
A
electrodes
Fig. 4.1
Plan an experiment to investigate the change in current in the liquid as the distance between the
electrodes is changed.
You should:
•
•
•
•
explain briefly how to do the investigation
state the key variables to keep constant
draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display your readings (you are
not required to enter any readings in the table)
explain how to use your readings to reach a conclusion.
© UCLES 2023
0625/62/M/J/23
-411-
11
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/62/M/J/23
-412-